GE - 700-800T Advanced Service Manual - ASM

GE Healthcare
Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition System
Advanced Service Manual
asm
0459
Reference 2149145-8EN
Revision 1
Copyright© 2007 by General Electric Company Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
GE Healthcare Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition System
Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN
X-Ray Warning
X-Ray Warning
WARNING
X-ray equipment is dangerous to both patient and Operator unless mea-
sures of protection are strictly observed.
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x-
ray beam becomes a source of danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified Operator. Exces-
sive exposure to x-radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from
operating this equipment or exposing themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the
Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals
Number 60 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
Page no. 2 Cover.fm

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
X-Ray Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 1: How To Use

1. How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-1 Troubleshooting faults on Senographe 700T/800T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-2 Signal Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-3 FRU List (or Renewal Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-4 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2. Other Documentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. Conventions for this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3-1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Guide

1. How to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 3: Error Messages

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2. Error Messages LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter 4: Signal Name List

1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2. Signal name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 5: FRU List (Renewal Parts)

1. Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2. FRU List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Chapter 6: Theory of Operation

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2. Mammocom Software Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2-1 Menu Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2-2 Purpose of Mammocom software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2-3 General User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2-4 Tree Structure of available Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2-5 Terminal Emulation description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2-6 Communication Parameters description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
2-7 File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
2-8 Help Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
2-9 Saving the Emulator Screen into a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
2-10 Access to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2-11 Clearing the Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Seno800T_TOC.fm Page no. 3

Table of Contents
2-12 Saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

2-13 Mammocom floppy disk contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2-14 Installation of Mammocom on hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2-15 Using Mammocom for parameters backup & reload, Stats and errors display . . . . . 198
3. LEDs Charts of Electronics cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4. Theory of Operation of Senographe 700T/800T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4-1 Generator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4-2 General Structure of Bonsai Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4-3 Power Requirements & DC BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4-4 Detailed description of Bonsai generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4-4-1 BIAS Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4-4-2 Heater Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4-4-3 Anode Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4-4-4 High-Voltage Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4-4-5 mA measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4-4-6 Line Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4-4-7 Tube Current (mA) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4-5 Description of Gantry Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4-5-1 Elevator function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4-5-2 Compression function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4-5-3 Arm Rotation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4-5-4 Exposure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Page no. 4 Seno800T_TOC.fm

How To Use
CHAPTER 1 HOW TO USE
1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

1-1 Troubleshooting faults on Senographe 700T/800T
This ASM manual allows to help you to troubleshoot origin of failures on Senographe 700T/800T.
Two methods are available according to the availibility or not of error message (s):
1) you have already got or noted an error message
• If you have already got or noted an error message, go to the chapter 3 Error Messages on page 85
then go to this message for instructions. Error Messages are presented in alphanumerical order.
• If you need to call GEMS Field Service about an error, you should quote the entire message or mes-
sages, complete with any identification characters.
2) you have not got or noted an error message
If you have not got or noted an error message, use the chapter 2 Troubleshooting Guide on page 9 as
follows:
1. Start at section # 1 of table 2 Troubleshooting Guide on page 9,
2. Read carefully the Recommended Actions:
- Instructions will indicates where to go next according results of tests or answers to questions.
1-2 Signal Name List

• The chapter 4 Signal Name List on page 143 provides you with all hardware signals that can be
found on a Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition System. It can help to follow the state of a signal
through the system.
They are presented in alphanumerical order.
1-3 FRU List (or Renewal Parts)

The chapter 5 FRU List (Renewal Parts) on page 165 provides the following:
• The information necessary to identify Renewal Parts (FRU) of Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition
System product.
• The Disassembly/Reassembly procedures (D/R Job cards) to replace defective Renewal Parts.
1-4 Theory of Operation

The chapter 6 Theory of Operation on page 183 is intended to help you to understand the system opera-
tion. It can be useful if you have to troubleshoot fault.
It includes the following three mains sections:
• Description of Mammocom Software that is used for senographe maintenance,
• LED Charts of all electronics boards of Senographe 700T/800T,
• Theory of Operation of Senographe 700T/800T.
- See Table of Contents on page 3 for detailed contents.
How-to-use.fm Page no. 5 Chapter 1

How To Use
2 OTHER DOCUMENTATIONS
Name Description & Notes
OTHER DOCUMENTA- part number 2135575-100 (English version) or later.

TION: Operator Manual Operator manuals are available in 6 languages (validated & provided by source
SCHEMATICS book pole)
xxxxxxx-100: English
xxxxxxx-101: French
xxxxxxx-106: Spanish
xxxxxxx-108: German
xxxxxxx-111: Italian
xxxxxxx-127: Portuguese
=========================================
SCHEMATICS 2148335-100 rev1 May 96 rev 2: January 97 or later.
OTHER DOCUMENTA- Part number of SM 2146692-100

TION: Service Manual Rev 1 issued on April 96. Rev 2 issued January 97, or later.
(part number), install
menu, spare part MAJOR DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Rev 1 & Rev 2:
Creation of CAL025: Check & adjustment of centering device lamp (coincidence of
X-ray field with light field)
Creation of CAL026: Check & adjustment of elevator safety switch.
CAL025 & CAL026 are in SM rev 2.
DR009 change: now the arm rotation brake alone is not a FRU. DR009 describes
the assembly replacement
------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
Explanation of “paddle" menu (illust 1-11 page 1-14). Path is Setup / install / AOP
/ PADDLE /
For each menu (18 X 24 24 X 30 Magn) there are two params: offset & gain.
---------------------------------------------------
SPARE PARTS: List of parts will not be complete in the future (new creations).
Some others will be replaced
by another part number. Use GSPL (global database) to know the part replace-
ment. Access is
1) Open PCICS
2) Clear the screen, and type GL18. Type the part number in the Service Part
field, Then press F14
3) Look at the satus of field “Replaced- by". If field = Y, then press F20 to get the
replacement part number.
Chapter 1 Page no. 6 How-to-use.fm

How To Use
Name Description & Notes
OTHER DOCUMENTA- There are two PIM documentations.

TION: Pre-installation
Manual Part number 2148333-100 for Senographe to be installed in a room:
Rev 1 beginning 96. Rev 2 May 96. Rev 3 beginning 97, or later.
Minimum high door to enter a seno 700T/800T in a room: 6 feet and 6 inches.
Nominal incoming line: See SM IST004 page 5/6.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
documentation part number: 2153233-100 for senographe to be installed in a
truck.
Rev 1. Rev 2 issued may 96. Rev 3 issued beginning 97, or later.
ITEMS SUPPLIED BY GE: Seno with the same standard base plate delivered with
all senos. A specific rad shield for seno in truck on customer request. A kit part
number 2122201
ITEMS TO BE SUPPLIED BY PEOPLE WHO EQUIPS THE TRUCK:

A base plate to be bold on the truck floor.
A base plate to secure the rad shield.
A power supply as described in chapter 2 of the PIM
How-to-use.fm Page no. 7 Chapter 1

How To Use
3 CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL

3-1 Definitions
The various safety and cautionary notes throughout this manual are defined as follows:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or mod-
erate injury.
! Notice:
Used for instructions to the user to prevent damage to property.
Note:
Used to draw attention to information that is important for the user to know.
Chapter 1 Page no. 8 How-to-use.fm

Troubleshooting Guide
CHAPTER 2 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
1 HOW TO USE
To use this Troubleshooting:
1. Start at section # 1 below (first row of table),
2. Read carefully the Recommended Actions:
- When necessary, instructions will indicates where to go next according results of tests or answers
to the given questions.
Note:
If you have already got or noted an error message, go to the chapter 3 Error Messages on page
85 then go to this error message for instructions.
This troubleshooting guide contains the following mains sections (for information):
• 1: POWER-UP
• 1-1: Keep alive status
• 1-2: Standby
• 2: SYSTEM INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE.
• 2-2: Input(s) of GEN_INTERFACE INPUT test not correct
• 2-3: Troubleshooting auto test console.
• 3: GANTRY
• 4: PREPARATION
• 5: GRAPHY
• 6: AEC
• 7: MEDICAL MENU
• 8: MISCELLEANOUS: ”Quick troubleshoot" Laptop Insite Image quality
2 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Section # TEST or STATUS RECOMMENDED ACTIONS
1 POWER-UP - To be able to switch on the senographe, the button “STOP” on the

console must be lit.
>>> If the button “STOP" is not lit, go to section 1-1.
# ACTION: If the button “STOP" is lit, press the " I " button on the
console: The Senographe Console Display must become active
and run the 6 init tests.
>>> If the console does not become active, select section 1-2
. If There are some three digit error codes or six digit error codes
alternatively displayed on the Senographe Console, go to chapter 3
Error Messages on page 85 and look for instructions.
. If the power up is OK, try to make a graphy preparation. (see sec-
tion 4).
TSG.fm Page no. 9 Chapter 2

1-1 KEEP ALIVE STATUS: Note: - This status is the necessary step to take in account a
“VS" voltage demand of power-up by the button “I" of the console. There is a
drawing of the console at page 5/6 of SM.
HINT: All name of voltage signal with S at the end (for instance
+15VS) must be present in the keep alive
THEORY OF SEQUENCE OF KEEP ALIVE STATUS (Etat de

Veille in French).
1) 300PL9 receives the incoming voltage from mains filter via Fuses
300-F1 & 300PL2.
2) From XJ10 300PL9, the incoming voltage goes to J3
300PL17.See SCHEMATICS book 300PL17 2/3.
3) The DC voltage across R26 (11 watts) is sent to the LVPS
300PL7.
This DC voltage supplies 300PL7 (300PL7 is not in the SCHEMAT-
ICS book, look at CAL024 in the SM).
Amplitude is approximately 320 Volts for incoming line of AC 240 V.
4) Output voltage from 300PL7 is sent to 300PL17 and energize K1.
See SCHEMATICS 300PL17 1/3
On 300PL17 + 15VBF: DS4
Note: These 3 leds are lit even if F1 F2 F3 are blown.

- 15 VBF: DS8 + 5VBF: DS6
5) 300PL17 distributes the “VS" voltage to 300PL6 via the cable
between J1 300PL17 & J9 300PL6.
The EPLD U16 on 300PL6 will send the "_LVS_PRE" at the power-
up request.
6) The cable between J4 300PL6 TO J4 300PL9 provides the +
15VS to 300PL9. Presence of + 15VS
is necessary to power-up. (in fact + 12V from regulator U1). See
SCHEMATICS 300PL9 5/8.
IN SUMMARY THE CORRECT STATUS OF KEEP ALIVE IS:

On 300PL17: Neon DS2 (parallel to K1 coil) DS10 must be lit. Leds
DS4 5 6 7 8 DS9 must be lit.
On 300PL9: red DS1 must be lit (SCHEMATICS 5/8 D6). Green
DS4 & DS5 must be lit.
Notice that this + 15V is not the one at input of regulator U1.
- If indicator “STOP" (OFF) of the Senographe Console is lit, go to

section 1-2.
- If indicator “STOP" (OFF) of the Senographe Console is not lit, go

to section 1-1-1.
Chapter 2 Page no. 10 TSG.fm

1-1-1 Keep alive status: Note: There is drawing of the console at page 3/6 of IST008 in SM.
300PL17 & 300PL7? . Check if DS10 neon lamp on 300-PL17 LV DISTRIBUTION Bd is
lit:
# ACTION 1) If neon DS10 is not lit,

check Fuse F4 on 300PL17 (SCHEMATICS 2/3)
check the presence of incoming line (AC) voltage on INPUT termi-
nals of 300-S1 fuses holder (The voltage entrance is at the lower
part of the fuse holder IF AC Mains voltage is not present, check
wiring on 300-PL16 MAINS FILTER BOARD
Check also ROOM breaker.
# ACTION 2) If neon DS10 is lit,
Look at DS2 300PL17.If the LED is not lit, it means one of the three
voltages from 300PL7 are not OK. Check cable between output of
300PL7 & J4 of 300PL17
>>> If DS2 300PL17 is lit, go to section 1-1-2 to continue checking

of “Keep alive status".
1-1-2 Low Voltage Power Sup- VERY IMPORTANT:

plies (LVPS) 300PL17 THE + 5 VOLT AMPLITUDE IS VERY CRITICAL AT THE TIME OF
+5V & -15V POWER UP.
The + 15 V and - 15 V are not adjustable but are dependent of the +
5 V amplitude.
IMPORTANT TO KNOW: The difference of the + 5 Volts (at TP39

300PL17 1/3) between the Keep alive status and standby (system
powered) is approximately 250 mV.
IF "+5V" IS LESS THAN 4.9 VOLTS in the keep alive status (mini-
mum load),
IT WILL NOT BE POSSIBLE TO POWER-UP the seno.
At this stage, adjust TP39 to 5.2 VOLTS. (TP42 is GND)
Beginning 97, another power supply 300PL7 will be introduced: fully
compatible.
Note: With some power supplies, it is difficult to adjust in a way to

get + 5 Volts on the CPU (when the system is powered. In this case
check the length of the fuse F2 on 300PL17.
The fuse holder allows to put a “long" fuse, but: USE ONLY A
SHORT DESIGN FUSE.
(because the drop of voltage across the fuse is smaller).
HINT: All names of voltage signals with S at the end (for instance
+15VS) on any boards must be present in the keep alive status.

1-1-3 +5VS + 15VS on - See SCHEMATICS 300PL9 2/8 E2. In keep alive status the +5 VS
300PL17: & distribution to must be present on 300PL9 to provide the + 15 VM & -15 VM.
300PL9
HINT: All names of voltage signals with S at the end (for instance
+15VS) in any boards must be present in the keep alive status.
The source of the +5VS is on 300PL17. See SCHEMATICS 1/3.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-From beginning 97 there is a “new" 300PL9 board. SCHEMATICS
of this new board are in the SCHEMATICS rev 2.
Look at the renewal part list chapter for info about the reason of the
modification on this board.
1-2 STANDBY: Power-up DEFINITION: POWER SEQUENCE must lead to the standby sta-
sequence from pressing tus. Standby is defined as following:
“ON" button on the con- All power supplies of the senographe are correct and the system
sole can execute a preparation if the preparation button is pressed.
REMINDER: To be able to power up the seno, the keep alive status

must be OK: (see section 1-1)
# ACTION: The button “STOP" is lit, press the " I " button on the
console.
The Senographe Console Display must become active, and run the
6 init tests.
If There are some three digit error codes or six digit error codes
alternatively displayed on the Senographe Console, go to error
message list chapter and look for instructions.
>>> If nothing happens when pressing " I " button, go to section 1-

2-1.
>>> If the lamp inside " I " button (ON) turns on, and stays lit
or the system power-up for 2 or 3 sec and shut OFF, go to section
1-3.
SEE ALSO section 2: BOOT & SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PRO-

CESS.
. If the power on is not possible, go to section 1-2-1.

1-2-1 “K" Failure: remove inhi- >>> If nothing happens when pressing the " I " button, go to section
bition by toggling B1-7 1-3.
CPU board. See also
172/040 1) If after pressing the " I " button the lamp inside the button stays lit
(DS2 & DS3 on 300PL9 are lit) BUT the console do not become
active the cause can be the + 5 volts from TP39 300PL17 is to low.
# ACTION 1) In keep alive status, adjust TP39 on 300 PL17 to 5.25

V by Pot on 300PL7.
2) If immediately after pressing the " I " button on the console DS2
on 300PL9 and red leds DS10 & DS11
on CPU board 300PL4, go on for half second and go off again, the
cause is a “K" failure still detected.
Note: a “K failure is a fault considered dangerous and there is a

inhibition to avoid the customer to switch on the seno. K failures are
related to the following functions:
Compression, Elevator, Arm rotation.
# ACTION 2) On 300-PL4 CPU Board, toggle switch B1-7 to inhibit

“K" failure lock.
3) Switch ON the senographe:

Normally the message “S31 Interlock Off" will be displayed on the
Senographe console.
Using MAMMOCOM Terminal software with Laptop connected to
the Senographe, access error codes buffer of the Senographe: F10/
F9/MAINT/MAINT/CODES/DISPLAY:
>>> Note the Error code displayed, and look at Error Message
chapter.

1-2-2 DS2 on 300PL9 must go Note: The normal power up sequence is: BP on energizes K1 on
on when ON button on 300PL9 via contact 11-13 of K2.
console is pressed. Then the contact 13-9 of K2 energizes K3. See SCHEMATICS
book 300PL9 page 5/8.
IMPORTANT: approximately from January 97 a new 300PL9 is

introduced in production. The former board is 21418775. The “new"
board is fully compatible from the point of view of connections with
its environment. Major reason of modification: Remove the pres-
ence of incoming line on 300 PL9 when the seno in not powered,
but in keep alive status.
The differences between the two boards are:
- Implementation of test points on the new one.
- Implementation of X2 relays to cut the “phase" AC_N_PH2. See
SCHEMATICS book 300PL9 page 1/8 coord E4
- Addition of two neons:
1) AC_ON to warn about the incoming line presence at the
“entrance" of the board (when the seno is in keep alive status or in
standby).
2) DC_BUS_0N
See IST003 in SM page 4/4 for general layout of 300PL9. The lay-
out of the new board is similar to the one shown ( Prepa & graphy
jumpers are more between J1 & J7 in the new layout).
# ACTION: After checking that the Stop button is lit, Press the " I "
button on the console.
>>> If lamp inside the " I " flashes, wait for K2 stops blinking.
If K2 does not stop after 1mn go to section 1-2-2-1.
>>> If nothing happens, go to section 1-2-3.
1-2-2-1 K2 300PL9 does not stop Note: The goal of this function is to inhibit the power-up the system
blinking if many power-up have been made in a short time.
“Path" of this signal from origin:
On 300PL6 9/14 EPLD U16 BLINK_OUT.

On 300PL6 8/14 led DS1 BLINK. _BLINK to 300 PL9 5/8 C1.

1-2-3 EMERGENCY LOOP: >>> go to section 1-2-3-1 to search where the loop is opened:
hint to shortcut com- description of main causes of opened loop.
pletely the loop.
HINT: There is a very quick way to short circuit the emergency loop
to locate the cause of why the system does not power. !!!!!!!!!! CAU-
TION WARNING: there are two design of 300PL9 boards:
First one: BE VERY CAREFUL WITH THIS BOARD. When the
SENO is in “keep alive status" the potential of incoming line is still
present on the board.
Second one: introduced beginning 1997: The major modification of
this board consists of an additional relay X2 to remove the incoming
potential on the board in keep alive status. On this new design
there are test points. The new board can replace the first one: fully
compatible with the environment.
PROCEDURE TO CHECK IF POWER UP IS OK by shortcutting

the emergency loop:
Before starting, make sure that the + 12 V on 3OOPL9 is present
(see SCHEMATICS 5/8). The +12 V is provided by the regulator
U1which receives +15 V (schematics at 1A).
# ACTION: Remove the cable connected to XJ5 of 300PL9 (con-

sole connection). Look at SCHEMATICS 5/8.
Make a jumper between pin 19 of XJ5 board side and the ground
(take the upper right screw which secure the board to the chassis
for the 300PL9 with no test points and TP1 for the new design of
300PL9. (pin 19 is B_ON signal).
>>> to locate pin 19 of J5, go to section 1-2-4.

# ACTION: Press the ON button on 300PL9. The system must
power-up.
CAUTION: The stop button on 300PL9 is of course inactive
(because the emergency loop is shunted)
>>> if the short circuit of the loop allows to power-up, go to section
1-2-3-1 to determine where the loop is opened .

1-2-3-1 Emergency loop continu- Search of this section: Why K1 relay on 300PL9 is not energized
ity with Button " I " (ON) when pressing " I " button.
See SCHEMATICS book 300PL9 page 5/8. The emergency loop
consists of:
a) On 300PL9: Se SCHEMATICS book 300PL9 5/8: BP OFF: Con-

tact normally closed.
b) On 300PL17: See SCHEMATICS book page 2/3: K1 contact 7-8.
K1 must be energized when power supply of 300PL17 are OK
(+5VS +15VS -15VS).
c) On 300PL18: See SCHEMATICS book Thermal switch normally
closed between pin 1 & pin 3 of J2 plug.
This internal contact in the transformer opens if temperature greater
than.... celsius.
This plug J2 can be seen in IST004 SM page 2/6. Name of the
board “soldered" to the transformer is: transformer voltage setting.
d) On 300PL5: See SCHEMATICS 4/10: combination of two con-
tacts in series of K1 K2 relays. This is the safety related to “K" fail-
ure (>>> see section 121).
e) GANTRY EMERGENCY SWITCHES: The two buttons are in
series and connected to plug XJ8 200PL1. See DR010 in SM &
SCHEMATICS book 200PL1. Disconnect the cable connected to
XJ8 & check with an ohmeter between the two pins of the cable.
f) CONNECTION by cable between XJ4 300PL9 and XJ4 300-PL6
g) CONSOLE: See SCHEMATICS 300PL9 5/8: BP OFF normally
closed.
h) CONSOLE: BP ON normally opened. (goes closed at the power-

up request).
i) On 300PL9: See SCHEMATICS contact 11-13 of K2 (blink).

1-2-4 Location of pin 19 of XJ5 To temporally short circuit the “emergency loop", remove the cable
300PL9 (To shortcut the from J5 and make a jumper between pin 19 and ground (upper right
emergency loop) screw to secure the board can be used or TP1 on the “new"
300PL9.
(See SCHEMATICS 1/8)
REMINDER: There are two design of 300PL9, but layout of XJ5 is

common:
Look also at IST005 page 4/6 for general layout of 300PL9 board.
LAYOUT OF PLUG XJ5 ON 300PL9:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
----------
| | J1 PLUG
----------
||1
| | 14
||2
| | 15
||3
| | 16
||4
| | 17
| |5 XJ5 PLUG on 300PL9.
| | 18
| |6
| | 19

1-3 SUPPLY DEFECT (HL THEORY: In standby, the DC BUS value must be: incoming line
SECURITY) - Signal voltage X 1.4. (220 AC gives 308 DC)
DC_BUS_OK
At the power-up if the DC-BUS voltage does not reach the value of
180 Volts in 2.5 sec the Power-up sequence is stopped. See
SCHEMATICS book 300PL9 4/8.
# ACTION: Check with a scope the ripple is double than the incom-
ing line frequency. (100 or 120 Hertz)
If the frequency is equal to the incoming line one, Replace 300PL9
board,
If the power sequence stops 2.5 sec after the action on " I " button,
# ACTION: Remove the wire between NUT_M5 300PL9 and the +
CAPA but.... WARNING: Remove the main Fuses (incoming line) or
shut off the wall breaker especially on seno.
DANGER: equipped with the first design of 300PL9, because the
incoming line potential is present on the board when the seno is in
keep alive status. See TSG section 1-2-3 for explanation.
Look at SCHEMATICS 300PL9 1/8: When the + CAPA wire is

removed the “DC-BUS" is still applied to heater function and rotor
function.
- Press the " I " button of the console:
>>> The power sequence is OK (everything seems normal,

included console, but of course we get errors by making a prepara-
tion). go to section 1-4.
>>> If the system does not power-up, go to section 1-3-1.

1-3-1 Power-up shut off after The capa is the DC-BUS one: 4700 micro Farad. See SCHEMAT-
2.9 sec with CAPA dis- ICS 300PL9 page 1/8.
connected. Reminder: there is a new 300PL9 board introduced in production
beginning 97, but no change about the connection of the capa.
GOAL OF THE SIMULATION TO REMOVE THE CAPA: Eliminate

the effects of eventual short circuit on the DC bus outside 300PL9
(particularly on 300PL10: HV inverter).
THEORY: At the beginning of power- up the rectifier bridge CR15

CR16 on 300PL9 at E9 must be supplied through resistor R85 250
watts. If this resistor is opened, there is no voltage across
the DC-BUS, and the power-up sequence is stopped by the system.
# ACTION: Open the main fuse holder (to remove the keep alive
status) and measure with an ohmeter across this resistor. See DR
30 in SM. The drawing of 300PL9 in 3/4 is the layout of the
“old" board 2141877. If the resistor is OK, the measured value is
approximately 100 ohms.
If the resistor is opened, the measurement must be 22 megohms
after 10 seconds in one direction and a very high resistance in the
other direction (+ -).
Note: This resistor is used to power the seno (current limitation dur-
ing the first seconds) and to discharge the DC-BUS at the power-
off.
1-4 Power- up is " OK " with See SCHEMATICS book 300PL9 1/8 E10
DC-BUS CAPA discon-
nected
If the power-up seems OK in this configuration, the cause is proba-
bly a short circuit outside 300PL9 on the inverter board.
THEORY REMINDER: If the DC_BUS does not reach 160 volts in a

timeout of 2.9 sec the power-up sequence is interrupted.

2 BOOT & SYSTEM INI- After Power-UP completion (LVPS_OK signal indicated by DS6 on
TIALIZATION PRO- 300PL6), CPU / Generator Interface initialization and Console auto
CESS & password to test sequences must start.
install menu access:
@5332 The Console is supplied in + 27 volts provided by 300PL13 & pro-
tected by F3.
24 Volts is a secondary wiring of 300T1.
Look at SCHEMATICS 300PL18 to see the setting jumper for
incoming line.
The layout of 300PL13 can be seen in IST006 3/4 in SM and
DR002 3/4: lower illust.
>>> If initialization sequence is not OK, go to section 2-1.
-------------------------------------------------
-----------------------
Password to access the install menu is: 5332
From application mode on the console, press:

1) setup/passwd
2) 5 then 3 then 3 then 2
3) setup/install/...........
Note: Access to install menu is also possible by changing the posi-

tion on switch 8 of B1 on CPU board
See SM page 1-5 illustration 1-3

2-1 System initialization 1) CPU Reset & MAINS Inhibit Switch Test. If not OK, CPU loops
sequence (CPU & inter- clicking relays (300-PL4 CPU Bd must
face) GEN_INT INPUT be replaced (check +5V before).
CPU TEST >>> go to section 2-1-1 for +5V adjustment.
2) Xilink download check: FPGA_OK yellow LED of 300-PL5 Inter-

face Bd must blink (1 second period):
# If not, replace 300-PL5 Bd.
3) Hardware Watchdog test: K failure presence: Rotation Elevator
comp. If not OK system shuts off.
Look at tsg section 1-2-1.
4) LED TEST-OK (green) on CPU 300PL4 board must be lit.
# If not, check +5V voltage between TP VCC & GND TP on
300PL4. >>> go to section 2-1-1 for +5V adjust.
5) 300-PL5 Interface Bd test: If not OK, an application error code is
displayed: process it using Error Message List.
6) Security relay test (K1 & K2 on 300-PL5 Interface Bd): If not OK,
replace 300-PL5 Bd (Error Code 172/xxx should be displayed).
7) Verify Gantry Power output: If not OK, an error code should be
displayed: see Error message list chapter.
8) CPU & Interface Boards initialization, application tasks creation:
If not OK, an error code should be displayed: process it using Error
Message List Chapter.
9) If Interface signals are not OK with Generator boards, the
GENE_SOFT_PRES LED must be lit.
Run the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST.
>>> go to section 2-2 to troubleshoot signal (s) with wrong status in

the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST
2-1-1 + 5 Volt adjustment by See CAL024 in the Service manual if necessary.

pot on 300PL7 when
300PL7 is fully loaded: Connect a DC meter between VCC (TP110) & ground (TP111) on
CAL024 of SM 300PL4: CPU board.
Adjust the potentiometer on 300PL7 to get + 5 volts at TP110 (toler-

ance: - 20 + 80 millivolts).
If problem to reach + 5V, look at TSG section 1-1-2.

After reading instructions in ch 1121 Replace 300PL7 if necessary.
CHECK OF the + 5V (VCC TP) on 300PL5.
When + 5V is correct on 300PL5, it will be correct on 300PL8 &

300PL6.

2-2 IF GEN_INTERFACE The CPU TEST associated to this section 22 is the “main" HV
INPUT not OK: strategic TEST. Signals in GEN_INTERFACE INPUT have the same status
locations to troubleshoot in the “main" HV test when the test is inactive.
SIGNALS INCLUDED IN THE HV TEST:
HV_0K TSG chapt. 522 HL SECURITY: 524 HL SECURITY: 524

HV_SUP_5 - - 523 - SUPPLY DEFECT - - - -- 5241 - SUPPLY
DEFECT - - 5241
- EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX 5242 - KV_DROPOUT 5252
- TIME_OUT_REGUL 5243 - HV_MAX ----------- 5253
- SCW - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5244 - MA_MAS --------- 5254
SIGNALS NOT INCLUDED
IN THE HV TEST: HEAT_OK 43 BIAS_OK.......................... 44
PREPA_SW_IN 411 | STARTER_OK J3-3 42
GRAPHY_SW_IN 411 STARTER STATE | STARTER_PRES J3-4
42
SYNC_GRID 38 | STARTER_ACCEL J3-5 42
DC_BUS_OK: path of this signal from origin is: On 300PL9 4/8:

detection of DC_MEAS. On 300PL6 9/14
EPLD U16 then 10/14 DS10. On 300PL5 3/10 DC_BUS TP. CAU-
TION: The normal value at this TP on 300PL5 is approx. 3.3 V for a
high logic level.
High level is OK if voltage is greater than 3.15 Volts.
MAINS_OK: “Path" of this signal from origin is approx. 0n 300PL9

2/8 B10: _MAINS_DETECT_OUT.
On 300PL6 EPLD U16. On 300PL6 DS9 “MAINS_OK". On 300PL5
3/10 MAINS TP. Normal value at MAINS TP is approximately 3.3 V.
High level is OK is voltage is greater than 3.15 Volts.

2-3 Senographe Console - Turn off the Senographe.

Test: auto test description
- Use small flat screwdriver to set console switch 100S1 (located
next to connector XJ3 for cable to generator) to its CENTER posi-
tion. See SM IST007 2/2.
CAUTION: - This switch has 3 positions: LEFT, CENTER and

RIGHT.
. LEFT is normal application position.

. CENTER is for console self-test.
. RIGHT is not used. If the Senographe is powered up with this
switch in the RIGHT position, correct power-up is impossible.
Instead, the console “beeps" at 1-second intervals, and communi-
cation with the service terminal is impossible. Also, the serial link
with the generator is interrupted.
- Turn on the Senographe. The following tests are executed auto-

matically in the following sequence:
1. Buzzer test (300ms): followed by message “OK".
2. Internal CPU RAM test: followed by message “OK".
3. External CPU RAM test: followed by message “OK".
4. Internal CPU timer test: followed by message “OK".
5. Serial link loop-back test: followed by message “OK".
. If one of these test is followed by message “ERROR", replace 100-

PL2 Console Control Bd.
>>> go to section 2-4 to continue Console self-test description.

2-4 Senographe Console 6. Alpha-numeric display test:

Test Description – contin- . If the display is not OK, replace the defective Fluorescent Display
ued Module.
7. Visual test of 6 lamps inside console keys.
8. Electrical consumption test: all displays and lamps are lit for 5
seconds.
. If not OK, i.e. displays are abnormally dim, replace 100-PL2 Con-
sole Control Bd.
At the end of this sequence, “Operator input test" message is dis-

played on the left-hand console display. The following tests require
the Service Engineer to activate the keys and knobs on the console.
9. Key tests: Service Engineer momentarily presses each key

(except 1st & 2nd trigger) on the console. The left-hand display
shows the function of the key being pressed;
10. kV and mAs knob tests: Service Engineer rotates each knob
step by step through each of its 12 absolute positions which are dis-
played on the left-hand display. The right-hand display shows rela-
tive knob positions.
. If the test 7, 9 or 10 is not OK, replace 100-PL1 Operator Bd.
- Stop the test: Switch S1 can be returned to its normal application

position (i.e. LEFT position - see CAUTION in preceding para) at
any time. This results in a console CPU reset and restoration of the
serial link with the generator.
Note: If S1 is returned to its normal application position during a
test, the test is completed before the change in switch position is
recognized. This means that several seconds may be necessary
before to normal application mode occurs.

3 GANTRY: Major differ- 700T 800T

ences between 700T & .TSG 31 ELEVATOR: YES YES
800T
.TSG 32 COMPRESSION: YES YES
.TSG 33 FILTER M0 M0 & RH
.TSG 34 ROTATION BRAKE (Examination arm) YES YES
.TSG 35 Light centering YES YES
.TSG 36 COLLIMATOR YES YES
.TSG 37 DISPLAY (Arm angle, comp. thickness & force) NO DIS-

PLAY YES
. TSG 38 BUCKY FUNCTION (grid) YES YES
. TSG 39 MAGNIFICATION YES
CONFIGURATION 700T or 800T: The configuration is set in install

menu. Path: Setup/install/Config/type
>>> See section 2 for using password (5332) to access the install
menu.
3-1 Elevator Function - Inhibi- NOTE 1) a) In application mode the elevator is locked when the
tion by compression & compression force detected is greater
CPU TEST description than 3 daN.
b) At power on, the paddle is not driven to home position. Therefore
the elevator and the arm rotation can be (it not at each power up)
locked if we do not command a decompression.)
NOTE 2) With 300PL1 2147559 the system does not generate an

error code if the motor is not connected to XJ2 300PL1.
(in this case, no voltage applied to the motor during a command).
. With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and

MAMMOCOM Terminal software running,
from Application mode, select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/ELEV.
>>> To troubleshoot signals in inactive test, go to section 3-1-1

3-1-1 Elevator: inactive test: - The following signals are also read when the test is inactive:
end of travel switches,
belt safety, speed fre- ELEVATOR LOW STOP: This switch 200S4 is connected to J9
quency 300PL1.When the elevator is at middle way this switch must be
closed & consequently status = N0
ELEVATOR SECURITY: This switch 200S5 is connected to J7

300PL1..When the elevator is at middle way this switch must be
closed & consequently status = N0.
Adjustment of switch is given in SN 4212.Procedure is also in
CAL026 in SM REV 2.
ELEVATOR HIGH STOP: This switch 200S3 is connected to J8

300PL1..When the elevator is at middle way this switch must be
closed & consequently status must be N0.
- When there is no movement, FCEM value is 150 kHz ± 10 kHz.
>>> To continue the test (active), go to section 3-1-2.

3-1-2 Elevator troubleshoot TO TROUBLESHOOT, ALWAYS SELECT AUTOTEST TO " NO".

with active test. (156/013) Check fuse F3 on 300-PL1 Elevator & Compression Bd:
. If fuse blows after replacement, check that these no short-circuit
between 30V ELEV (upper side of F3)
and ground: must be roughly 1,5K. (for part number 2147559) If not,
replace 300-PL1 Bd.
# ACTION: From the screen <00414> press elevator hand switch

up, then hand switch down.
If status do not go to section “YES", check connections of cables
W230 between 200-PL1-J11-J12
and Handle switches. Check also connection between 300-PL5 (J7)
and 200-PL1: cable W104.
. If the connections are OK, replace handle switch involved.
. If the problem is still present after handle switch replacement,
replace 200-PL1 Bd.
THEORY ABOUT SIGNALS IN THE TEST: The sequence is:

1) Elevator soft presence 2) Elevator command Presence 3) Eleva-
tor presence.
Origin of Elevator Presence is signal “State on 300PL1 4/8 A5.

State becomes Elev_stat_off page 1/8 and sent to 300PL5. Test
point Elev_off on 300PL5 is the same point.
Note: 300PL1 (P/N: 2147559) is a multi-layer board and many

components are on the opposite side of the side we see when
board is installed in the cabinet.
- If the column goes always the same way (UP or DOWN), what-
ever the button UP or the button DOWN is pressed, then a problem
happened on 300-PL1 Elevator & Compression Bd ( motion
request, pin 6 of U1 remains at 5V or 0V). Replace 300-PL1 Bd.
>>> if the column moves but the movement is “very" jerky (broute)
go to section 3-1-3.

3-1-3 Elevator (column): jerky With CPU version V2-11 and 300PL1 part number 2147559 the col-
movement umn movement is not smooth, and there is a significant dispersion
between different senographes.
In the case of a “very poor" movement, there are three causes:

1) The arm is not correctly balanced (covers are not in place, bucky
is not on the image receptor)
2) The elevator motor is damaged.
3) There is “dur mecanique" in the column movement
Check of issue 2:
Check of issue 3:
3-2 Compression Function: " IMPORTANT: If the compression:

main " CPU TEST 1) moves in both directions for a short distance,
description @00416 2) gets a significant compression force (wrong if we assumes we
are in this failure configuration) do not display the force when the
decompression movement stops
3) and the system does not generate error code. Then the calibra-
tion is probably wrong.
# ACTION: Perform CAL019: CALIB compression force detector.
----------------------------------------------
If F1 300PL1 (Elevator & comp board) is blown the footswitches do
not command the decompression.
If only F1 300PL1 (at A4) is bad, the decompression works from the
decompression
button on the console.
- To use COMPRESSION MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:

With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAM-
MOCOM Terminal software running,
select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP from Application mode.
>>> The following screen should be displayed:
All status must be on “NO" except compression auto test at “YES"

adjust count at 00000 and Compression cmd presence & compres-
sion presence are to “YES" when test is inactive if the
compression function is OK. In fact, when test is inactive, there is
the same configuration that in application mode. The compression
motor is supplied (therefore commanded) to keep the paddle at any
location between bucky and home position).
>>> go to section 3-2-1 to continue the test.

3-2-1 Compression: trouble- F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP

shoot with inactive " main
" test @00416 TERM DEFINITIONS:
" Adjustment presence": Detection of command from turning knobs

on the fastener paddle assembly.
The status is detected also in inactive test.
“Adjustment Count": Step number" seen by the CPU.
“Foot switch presence": one of the two micro switches in each half
pedal. One half for comp, other half for decomp.
“Compression Security" This is a complex software security. THIS
IS NOT the maximum compression force.
Before interpreting the test, make sure the compression motor is
connected to
XJ6 300PL1.
DO NOT TAKE IN CONSIDERATION THIS SIGNAL FOR TROU-
BLESHHOOT.
CAUTION: It is mechanically possible to connect the plug in the
wrong direction. The visible wire outputs from the plug must be
directed to the up side. If the two motor coils are reversed, the comp
movement slips.
CHECK OF FINE TUNE KNOBS OPERATION:
# ACTION: Turn one knob on fastener paddle assembly.

If adjustment presence does not switch to yes, check that the 4 wire
cable is connected to J2 plug at the top of the 200PL7. DR021 in
SM page 3/4 arrow 7 shows 200PL7.
+ 5 V Power supply of the encoder board 200PL8 must be present
between pin 4 & pin 1.
>>> go to section 3-2-2 to continue the test
To access Compression sub-tests (Force & Thickness), go to sec-

tion 3-2-2.
3-2-2 Compression: trouble- F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP/

shoot with active " main " To troubleshoot on the hardware, CONFIGURE AUTOTEST TO
test @00416 “YES".

3-2-3 Compression subtest - This sub-test is accessed by pressing F1 from the “main" compres-
Force sion test.
From application mode select: F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP/
FORCE.
“Fequency Force KHZ" This sub-test is OK when the freq Force

KHZ is between 32 and 154 KHZ. If the frequency from the hall
effect captor is not present or not transmitted to the frequency is 0
Khz (Effect hall captor is located on 200PL7 board.
DR021 in SM page 3/4 arrow 7 shows 200PL7.
Frequency decreases when compression increases.
- If the frequency is 0 hertz, check the power supply of 200PL7

board.
- If the frequency does not change when simulating a compression

(By pushing the paddle or fastener paddle assembly in upwards
direction), the magnet behind the effect hall captor is not in place.
Note: The variation of frequency is given by the travel of the mag-

net in relation to the effect hall captor, therefore in relation to
200PL7. The position of the 200PL7 (DR021) is not very critical to
successfully
perform CAL019 (force calibration). Optimum position gives a fre-
quency Force of 100 Hz +/- 15 Hz
If for any reason 200PL7 is temporally removed, perform CAL019
after.
>>> See TSG section 3-7 for Force display on the gantry readout.
(800T only)
>>> To access Compression sub-test “Thickness", go to section 3-
2-3.

3-2-4 Compression sub-test: Note: There is a thickness detection only on 800T model. See TSG
thickness (note about 83 for consequence on Image quality.
“paddle menu" in install This sub-test is accessed from main compression test screen by
menu pressing F2.
F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP/THICK.
The following screen should be displayed
Thickness data is given by a potentiometer (see SM DR020 3/4

illust 2 arrow 1).
This pot is connected to 200PL9. 200PL9 is located next to the x-
ray tube at the same side of “maint" plug to connect the laptop.
NOTE 1: When the potentiometer is disconnected, with CPU V2-11

the thickness displayed is always 50 mm
(Ignore it)
NOTE 2: in the thickness comp test, the mag plate does not change
the thickness reading.
Note: Values of offset & gain in paddle choice menu does not influ-
ence the thickness calibration, but before performing CAL009,
check values of offset & gain are correct in relation to paddle used.
For 18 X 24 injected paddle part number 2147091, set offset = +1

(+1.000E+0) gain = + 0.6 (+6.000E-1)
For 18 X 24 injected paddle part number 2164663, set offset = +1
(+1.000E+0) gain= + 0.6 (+6.000E-1)
For 24 X 30 injected paddle, set offset = +1 (+1.000E+0) gain = +
0.8 (+8.000E-1)
Magnification paddle, set offset = +2 (+2.000E+0) gain = + 0.2
(+2.000E-0)

3-3 Filter Function (800T - To use FILTER MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:
model only) - CPU TEST
description . With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and
select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/FILTER from Application mode.
Note: The access of this test requires PRS_A to yes in the install
menu.
PRS_A means presence arm and is used mostly for manufacturing
purposes. See S25 for more info.
With 800T: If 700T is configured in install menu, the filter test is not
accessible.
Path of configuration: Setup/ install/ config/ type
CYCLE (F4) command gives a permanent movement.

Check of “Filter reference signal" turn manually the wheel filter
when test is inactive. The status of the
signal must toggle to YES NO.
Press “INIT" (F1) and see if the filter moves. INIT command gives a
movement similar to the movement at the power up (initialization
tests).
Check LED DS1 on 200PL9: must be always lit.
>>> If the Filter doesn't move go to section 3-3-1.
3-3-1 Filter Function (800T Note: The filter wheel part number is the same than the DMR.
model only) Aluminum filter is present on the wheel even if with a 800T Alumi-
num filter is never used.
IMPORTANT: There is no key to configure “FILTER BOARD

AUTOTEST" to “NO"
(there is an error on the illust test layout).
However, if there is a fault of the movement, the CPU keeps the
command activated.
Check that W212 cable is connected to J2 of 200PL9.
. W103 between 300-PL5-J6 INTERFACE Bd and 200-PL9-J1

ARM2 DISTRIBUTION Bd.
. W215 between 200-PL9-J3 ARM2 DISTRIBUTION Bd and 200-

M3 Filter Motor.

3-4 Arm Rotation (Brake) - a) Note: In application mode Arm rotation is locked when the com-
Inhibition by compres- pression force detected is greater than 3 daN.
sion & CPU TEST
@00418> description b) Note: At power on, the paddle is not driven to home position.
Therefore the Elevator and the arm rotation can be (it not at each
power up) locked if we do not command a decompression.)
c) Note: The access of this test requires PRS_A to yes in the install
menu PRS_A means presence arm and is used mostly for manu-
facturing purposes. See S25 for more info.
. To run the test: Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAM-

MOCOM Terminal software running, select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/
ARM/ROT from Application mode.
When entering the test (inactive) the signals must have the status
indicated on the illustration.
Note: Angle signal value is roughly 80 kHz for 0 degree Angle. For
800T model, the Angle freq signal shall move as well as the Angle
value signal while rotating. Angulation is indicated as trigonometry
reading.
ANGULATION CHECK & CALIBRATION: If arm rotation works but

display is not accurate enough in relation to the actual arm vertical-
ity do the following:
#ACTION 1) Connect a DC meter between TP2 page 3/4 200PL9 2/

3 and TP1 (GND) check the voltage is 5.0 V +/- 0.1Volt. (procedure
in SM DR008 page 3/4).
2) Perform CAL008: Calibration of examination arm angle measure-

ment.

>>> See section 3-7 for display of angle on gantry readout.

3-4-1 Arm Rotation or Brake F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/ROT.

function. # ACTION: From screen <00418> Press one of the rotation button
on the handle.
-Rotation switch, Operator presence must switch to yes.

If not: Verify the connections of the following cables:
. W230, between 200-S6,S7,S8 & S9 ROTATION BRAKE
SWITCHES and 200-PL1-J11, J12 ARM1 Bd.
. W104, between 200-PL1-J1 ARM1 Bd and 300-PL5-J7 Interface
Bd. Replace the handle if necessary.
THEORY ABOUT SIGNAL IN THE TEST: The command sequence

is:
1) Rotation soft presence 2) Rotation Command Presence 3) Rota-

tion Presence
Origin of Rotation presence is signal " R_off " on 300PL2 3/4. This
signal becomes Rot_stat_off on page
1/4 sent to 300PL5. Test point ROTOFF on 300PL5 is the same
point tyhat Rot_stat_off.
When puissance is active, TP ROTOFF goes to “0" logic. On
300PL5, 0 logic must be less than 300 mV.
3-5 Light Centering Function Note: The access of this test requires PRS_A to yes in the install
-CPU TEST description menu.
@00412 PRS_A means presence arm and is used mostly for manufacturing
purposes. See S25 for more info
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-----------------------
- To use LIGHT MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:

select F10/F9MAINT/MAINT/ARM/LIGHT from Application mode.
SIGNIFICATION OF " Light centering self test" When this line is

configured to YES, if a fault is detected in
the function the test generates an error code and the CPU removes
the command.
TO make measurement on the hard, ALWAYS CONFIGURE SELF

TEST ON “YES"
# Action: Press the Light Switch and check that Light Switch and
Light Presence signals switch to YES.
>>> If not, go to section 3-5-1.

3-5-1 Light Centering Function. F10/F9MAINT/MAINT/ARM/LIGHT

- Check fuse F6 on 300-PL2 LIGHT & ROT. Bd.
# ACTION: Configure light centering auto test to “YES"

From screen <00412 > press F3 on the laptop or button on the han-
dle:
Light switch signal must go to section “YES"
If the signal goes to “YES" only when commanded by F3, there is a
problem about wiring of button or button.
. Check connection of cable W105 on J4 of 300-PL2 Bd (200-L1

Light Centering Lamp Power Supply).
LIGHT PRESENCE must “YES"
. If not: Check continuity (lamp + cable) between the two terminals
of cable W105:
Check connections between 300-PL2- Bd (J1) and 300-PL5 (J10)
Interface bd (cable W2).
Origin of signal light presence is signal L_off on 300PL2 2/4. This
signal becomes LIGHT_STAT_OFF
page 1/4 and sent 300 PL5. On 300PL5 this same signal is called
LIGHT_FAIL 2/10 B10.
3-6 Collimator: CPU TEST COMMENT: In application mode the focus (LF or SF) is made by
description <00420> 200PL2 board. The push button on the console is disabled. The
(Focus selection in appli- console only displays the " focus " detected by 200PL2 board
cation mode) according to the collimator in place.
Note: The acces of this test requires PRS_A configured to yes in

the install menu.
To use COLLIMATOR MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:

MOCOM Terminal software running,
select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/1>2/COLLIM from Application
mode.
- On DIAPH (x) signals not more than two must be active ( status=
01) at any time. If different diaphragms are inserted, it should be
possible to watch these signal changes.
>>> If no change happens, go to section 3-6-1.

3-6-1 Collimator Function. - Remove and replace the collimator blade to reset.
- There should never be more then two signals active( status=1) at

any time. If different diaphragms are inserted (one after the other), it
should be possible to watch these signal changes.
. If they do not change then the action would be to use a meter and
determine if the status of these signals is changing at 200-PL1
when a diaphragm is inserted.
- Check yellow LED on 300-PL5 Interface Bd (FPGA_OK). It must

blinking one second period. If not, see section 21.
- Check connections of cables W207 and W208 between 200-PL2

J1 COLLIMATOR DETECTION Bd and 200-PL1 J9 DISTRIBU-
TION Bd.
. If the connections are OK, replace 200-PL2 Bd (Bad encoding of

200-PL2 Bd).
. If a problem is still present after 200-PL2 replacement, replace
200-PL1Bd.
. If this error is still present after 200-PL1 replacement, replace 300-
PL5 Interface Board.
Note: The only way to reset this error is to turn the system off and
on after correcting the cause of the error. If more then two of these
signals are active at power up, the error will be logged and the sys-
tem will never permit exposure.

3-7 Display (readout):Angle Note: This test is used ONLY to check the correct operation of the
(rotat) comp thickness & gantry readout (See SM illust 5-1 p 5-2 & illust. 5-20 page 5-44. In
force (800T) -CPU fact the test sends a command to supply all segments of the read-
TEST@00423 out included the two dots for comp force & thickness.
This test IS NOT USED to calibrate arm angulation, compression

thickness or comp force.
>>> ARM ANGULATION: go to section 3-4 for calibration.
>>> COMPRESSION THICKNESS: go to section 3-2-4 for calibra-
tion.
>>> COMPRESSION FORCE: Go to CAL019 of the service Manual
for calibration.
To use this TEST, with Field Laptop connected to the Senographe

and MAMMOCOM Terminal software running, select F10/F9/
MAINT/MAINT/ARM1/>2/DISPL from Application mode.
menu.. See S25 for more info.
With 800T, If 700T is selected in install menu, the filter test is not
accessible. Path: Setup/ install/ config/ type
INACTIVE TEST: The gantry Readout displays the “actual" values

of the system. In fact, inactive test is not useful.
ACTIVE TEST: # ACTION: From screen <00423> press F3 (ON).

The gantry readout must display the same thing as the laptop (In
this test, data on the laptop is like a reference sent to the readout).
Note: It is necessary to stop the test (by F4) to leave this test by F9.
AFTER LEAVING THE TEST THE READOUT DISPLAYS ONLY

TWO DOTS. Do a OFF/ON of the seno to
retreive the correct display. (true for CPU version V3-11)
>>> go to section 3-7-1 to see the block diagram or if the readout
does not display the correct data.

3-7-1 Display of Arm rotation F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM1/>2/DISPL

angle compression thick-
ness & force.
Gantry readout is shown in SM illust 5-1 p 5-2 & illust. 5-20 page 5-
44
Check the connection of cable W114 at J1 at the 200-PL4 READ-

OUT DISPLAY and J4 on 300-PL5
Interface Bd.
CAUTION: High risk of damage the 200PL4 board !!!
REMINDER: This test IS NOT USED to calibrate arm angulation,

compression thickness or comp force.
For Calibration of:
ARM ANGULATION: go to section 3-4

COMPRESSION THICKNESS: go to section 3-2-4
COMPRESSION FORCE: Go to CAL019 of the service Manual

3-8 Bucky Function -GRID - To use GRID MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:
CPU TEST description: Put a bucky in place on the image receptor.
@00291> & LED test: . With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and
@00428 MAMMOCOM Terminal software running,
select F10/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/1>2: GRID from Application
mode.
menu.
. The following screen should be displayed:

- If 027/003 or 027/004 is displayed as soon as entered the test,
check the 30 V (TP2) on 200PL2.TP1
is the 0 volt. If 30 V no present, check Fuse F2 on 300PL13.
Check F5 on 300PL2 (If blown red DS3 is lit)
If F5 blows again as soon as replaced, check there is no short cir-
cuit between 30 V Statif (upper side of F5) and ground.
>>> go to section 3-8-1 to continue troubleshoot of GRID with inac-
tive test.
****************************************************************
LED MAINTENANCE TEST: <00428> This test turns on the red led
called “Used film led" located at the middle of arm just over the
bucky.
F3 turns on the led,
F4 turns off the led and allows to leave the screen <00428>.
Note: The acces of this test requires PRS_A to yes in the install
menu.
purposes. See S25 for more info.
3-8-1 Grid test with inactive test Screen < 00291> F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT
- Remove the Bucky. Change it or reinstall it again to reset the

Bucky Control Board if necessary.
(The Start_ Bucky signal should be actived for 10 ms to check the
good Sync_Grid acknowledgment)
" Grid presence" must be YES. If the grid is not detected check the
“bucky " physically in place is not a cassette holder (no grid inside).
“Format 24 X30 " is given by a position of a jumper inside the bucky.
See SCHEMATICS book 200PL10.
“Cassette presence": Check the commutation of yes no by inserting
and then removing the cassette.

3-8-2 Grid test troubleshoot # ACTION: From the screen <00291> press the first trigger;
with active test - The signal " Sync grid presence" must switch to YES and " bucky
failure" must stay to NO.
Explanation of “Grid self-test": When the grid test is inactive it is
possible to select this line to NO by F6
When self-test is selected to YES, the test will display a error code
on the laptop screen if bucky failure
When self-test is selected to NO, the test will not display the error
code.
VERY IMPORTANT Note: Stopping the test does not reset the pre-
vious error code:
It is necessary to remove the bucky and plug it again to reset the
previous fault.
>>> go to section 3-8-2-1 to see signification of DS2 DS3 DS4 leds

on 200PL3.

3-8-2-1 200PL3: Bucky command LED STATUS WHEN BUCKY IS REMOVED: Look at SCHEMAT-
board. Red leds DS2 DS3 ICS book 200PL3 3/4.
DS4 (& grid lines) DS1 green: -15 V must be LIT; DS2 red & DS3 red & DS4 red must
be LIT.
DS5 green: must be OFF
When we put the bucky in place, DS5 goes lit immediately and
stays lit. Init starts approximately 6 sec after that the bucky is con-
nected.
COMBINATION OF THE THREE LEDS DS2 DS3 DS4 ON 200PL3
BOARD:
FAILURE TYPE EVENT DS2 DS3 DS4
Bucky removed ON ON ON
Edge detector failure after init ON OFF OFF
Travel failure after init OFF ON OFF
Step loss failure after init OFF OFF ON
Left centering index failure after init ON ON OFF
Right centering index failure after init OFF ON ON
==================================================
===================================
IMPORTANT: Travel failure (DS3 ON) is mostly of the time a wrong
position of the flag in relation to the opto coupler. In this case,
replace the bucky. DO NOT TRY TO AJUST the position of the flag.
This adjustment can be performed IN FACTORY ONLY. The reso-
lution is 30/1000 mm (micron) per step of the
stepper motor. It makes this adjustment very difficult. REMINDER:
The needle U32 on 200PL3 must be opened.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
PROUNOUNCED GRID LINES: One cause of the presence of grid
lines can be the no detection of grid presence by the system. In this
case, the system does not command the grid, considering a cas-
sette
holder is in place.
# ACTION: Check the signal “grid presence" in the GRID test (see
section 3-8-1).

3-9 Magnification (800T SOME CLARIFICATION ABOUT MAGNIFICATION BETWEEN

model only) - Test 700T & 800T:
description @00421
It is possible to make mag views with a 700T. The mag ratio is indi-
cated by a ribbon stuck on the column.
But there is no mag detection board 200PL6. Look at TSG section
8-3 for info on “new" cassette holder.
A) WITH 800T 200 PL6 informs the CPU of the physical mag posi-
tion. This data is used for:
THICKNESS DISPLAY: The system needs to know the position of
the mag stand to determine the
" actual " breast thickness.
AOP & AEC: The system needs to know the mag ratio & thickness
to determine the parameters of pre-exposure (KV filter) in AOP & to
drive optical density compensation in AOP & AEC during exposure.
DATAFLASH: The system provides this data to the dataflash.
B) WITH 700T:
THICKNESS DISPLAY: there is no thickness display on a 700T.
AOP & AEC: CPU uses a default value of 5cm thickness and a
composition of 50% for AOP
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -
To use MAGNIFICATION MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:

MOCOM software running, select
F10/F9/ MAINT/MAINT/ARM/1>2/MAG from Application mode.


3-9-1 Magnification (800T Note: The access of this test requires PRS_A configured to yes in
model only) the install menu.
------------------------------------------
When the mag plate is not installed, magnification 1.05 must be at
“YES"
#ACTION: Set the mag plate in position 1.5 (lower holes).

Magnification 1.5 must be to YES
If not Check the connection of the following cables:

W218 between 200-PL6-J1 MAGNIFICATION Bd and 200-PL9-J6
ARM2 DISTRIBUTION Bd.
W103 between 200-PL9-J1 Bd and 300-PL5-J6 INTERFACE Bd.
Check also the presence of the magnet inserted in the left pin of the
mag plate.
- If the cable connections are OK, replace 200-PL6 Magnification

Board.
4 PREPARATION (Theory) In application, there are three exposure modes. Of course, the user
must select one (choose one) of them before
making the preparation.
1) MANUAL MODE: The user selects KV value and mAs value.
2) AEC MODE: The user select only the KV and the Auto Exposure
Control terminates the
exposure when the optical density target is reached.
3) AOP MODE:: The system automatically chooses the technique

of exposure (KV value & filter)
according to the computation performed at the end of the pre-expo-
sure.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIRST STEP OF EXPOSURE: PREPARATION.
At the preparation the system must: 1) Activate the rotor function. 2)

Activate the heater function.
3) Activate the bias function.
The preparation is authorized only if the red inhibition led is off (see
IST008 3/6 illust 2: Led
at the right upper corner of the console).
<<< If the graphy symbol (RED) on the console is lit, go to section

4-1.
- If nothing happens, go to section 4-1.

4-1 Prep inhibit: Red graphy - To use SENSOR MAINTENANCE TEST, do the following:
symbol on console
lit.SENSOR TEST: tube . With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and
secu housing fan MAMMOCOM Terminal software running,
select SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/1>2/SENSOR from Application
mode.
FAN PRESENCE signal must be “YES" and TUBE SECURITY sig-

nal must be 'NO".
>>> If the red graphy symbol is off, but nothing happens when
pressing the first trigger, go to section 4-1-1.
4-1-1 First trigger: nothing hap- - The 700T/800T has an interlock board to inhibit the prepa and gra-
pens when pressing first phy when the door of X-ray room is
trigger (door interlock) opened.
Look at IST005 in SM 2/6 for block diag. Look at SCHEMATICS

book 300PL9 7/8 at 6D and 300PL14
See the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST to check if the CPU sees

the command of the buttons from the
console
To use INTERFACE GENERATOR INPUT TEST, do the following:
With laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM Ter-

minal software running,
select from application mode: F10 / F9 / SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/
1>2/INTG
REMINDER: In this test only status of PREP must change when

pressing PREP button
or GRAPHY when pressing graphy button.
# ACTION: Press the first trigger and check the signal status goes
to YES.
Press the second trigger and check the signal status goes to YES
>>> If one or both buttons are not recognized, go to section 4-1-1-1.

4-1-1-1 Defective push buttons REMINDER: The 700T/800T console is the same than the DMR
on console console.
Do not forget it is possible to connect on the console the same hand

switch used with AMX 4.
It is a good means to determine if S01 is due to bad contact of con-
sole button.
Kit part number 2144969 includes two pushbuttons.
See information about S01 error message.
4-2 ROTOR (Anode Starter) - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAM-
CPU TEST description MOCOM Terminal software running, from application mode, select
F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/ROTOR
The 3 following signals: Rotor presence, Rotor active presence,

Acceleration presence are also checked in
GEN_INTERFACE_INPUT on the same line called " STATER
STATE"
>>> go to section 4-2-1 for “path" of these signals.
Note: There is only one speed available (3000 revolution per

minute). Therefore, F1 has no effect.
THE TEST IS OK when during the test, Rotor presence & Rotor
active presence must be triggered to YES, Acceleration presence
must be triggered to YES then NO.
>>> To continue the test, go to section 4-2-1.

4-2-1 Rotor: Signals: Rotor REMINDER: These three signals are also checked in the
presence, Rotor active GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST on a same line called “STARTER
pres, Acceleration pres STATE". In the rotor test the names are:
@00285 “Paths" of these 3 signals (names used in CPU rotor test) from ori-
gin are approximately:
ROTOR PRESENCE (related to 300PL5 J3 pin 3):
0n 300PL6 3/14 PRES_I_LC (TP30). Must be at “0" V logic when

test inactive.
EPLD U16: Starter out OK. DS13 led 10/14 Starter_OK. Must be off
when test is inactive.
If not replace 300-PL6 Bd.
On 300PL5 TP ST_OK. Must be “0" V logic (less than 300 mV)
when inactive.
Level “1" is around + 4.010 Volts.
ROTOR ACTIVE PRESENCE (related to 300PL5 J3 pin 4):
On 300PL9 4/8 F10: _Starter_pres_in.

On 300PL6 7/14 _Starter_pres_in then 10/14 starter_pres_out,
DS7 led must be off when test is inactive.
ACCELERATION PRESENCE (related to 300PL5 J3 pin 5):
On 300PL9 4/8 F10: _Starter_accel_in.

On 300PL6 7/14 _Starter_accel_in then 10/14 starter_accel_out,
DS8 led (must be off when test is inactive).
>>> go to section 4-2-2 to continue.

4-2-2 Rotor test: with active SIGNIFICATION OF AUTOTEST: When auto test is configured to
test. @00285 YES, an error code is generated when the test is not correct and
then the test is stopped.
When Autotest is selected to" NO", the test command is maintained
even if the result is not OK.....
..... Therefore, ALWAYS SELECT AUTOTEST TO NO TO TROU-
BLESHOOT..
# ACTION: iF fuse F2 on 300-PL9 POWER SUPPLY Bd always

blows:
Disconnect cable from XJ3 300-PL11 to detect a shortcut. Replace
300PL12 if necessary.
# ACTION: Check DC_BUS is present between PT23 & PT22

300PL12 1/23
From screen <00285> Press first trigger.
If Rotor active presence and acceleration presence do not switch to

YES:
Connect a DC meter between PT8 of 300PL12 1/3 & ground

(for ground, use a screw which secures the board to the chassis).
Voltage must be + 12 Volts +/- 300 mV
The source of this "+ 12V_coupe" is on 300PL6 6/14 A10
<<< go to section 4-2-3 to check the presence of transistor com-

mand.
>>> To continue go to section 4-2-3.

4-2-3 Rotor: Check of presence The goal of this # action is to check the presence of command of
of transistor commands one power transistor on 300PL12 and if necessary on 300PL6. We
on 300PL12 first assume if we visualize a square signal the timing is OK and it is for
all transistors. Therefore in practice, we check that 300PL6 receives
command from interface.
WHERE ON SCHEMATICS: Transistor collectors on 300PL6 4/14

command transformers on 300PL12.
# ACTION: Connect a scope between TP1 on 300PL12 & ground

(take the screw that secures the board.
Select auto mode 0.1 ms / div 2 Volts / div.
At this stage, the signal is + 12 V with “short" spikes of approxi-
mately 4 Volts.
# From screen <00285> configure auto test to “NO" then press first
trigger.
If there is no signal, change the scope probe of location:

Connect the scope between TP16 300PL6 and ground (take a
screw which secure the board)
At this stage, the measured voltage must be “0”volt
# From screen <00285> press the first trigger.
The signal must be a square signal of approx. 4.2 Volts.
If the square signal is not present replace 300PL6.

4-3 Heater Function - CPU . With Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM Ter-
TEST description minal software running, from
@00286 application mode select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HEAT
HEAT_OK is also checked in GEN_INTERF INPUT. No TP on

300PL5 but look at 300PL11 10/14 DS11
THE TEST IS OK, when heater detection signal (HEAT_OK) goes
to YES & stays to YES.
SIGNIFICATION OF AUTOTEST: When auto test is selected to

“YES" an error is displayed if the test is not OK and the test com-
mand is removed.
Therefore, TO TROUBLESHOOT, ALWAYS SELECT AUTOTEST
TO " NO"
# ACTION 1) from the screen <00286>, press the first trigger.
If the heater test stays inactive, think of interlock by the door (see
section 411).
Select the other “TRACK" in the 800T (track 1 is Large Focus and
track 2 is Small Focus)
to check if one works. (if one works, it means 300PL5 300PL6
300PL11 are OK).
If only one focus does not work, make a jumper to simulate the fila-
ment:
CAUTION: for safety reason remove the cable connected to plug J3
300PL8 (Inhibition of HV command)
See SM CAL001 3/6. Remove the cable from the x-ray tube & make
a jumper between C and L or S at the HV cable end according to
the defective focus (There is no danger for heater inverter and no
risk of damage if jumper is not at the right location)
# From screen <00286> press the first trigger. If the heater test is
OK the x-ray tube filament is opened.
However, check the continuity of the HV cable.
>>> If both focus does not work, go to section 4-3-1.

4-3-1 Heater test:300PL6: F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HEAT:

HEAT_ON & TP20 (ref fil-
ament current) THEORY: There are three (3) important leds on 300PL6
DS2:(red) HEAT_OVLD (overload)

DS3 (red) HEAT_OP_F (opened filament) means the current
detected in serie with the primary of filament transformer is less
than IP_MIN or IN_MIN.See SCHEMATICS 300PL6 1/14 F5.
DS11 (green) HEAT_OK: same signification than “heater detection"
in the CPU test.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# ACTION 1) See SCHEMATICS book 300PL6 1/14 A9 Connect a
meter between the common point of R228 and
R185 and TP42 of 300PL17 (0V). Look at IST006 2/4 SM for
300PL17.
From the screen <00286 > press first trigger.
The signal must be a logic level “1" (Volts). If the signal is not OK
check the connection between XJ3 300PL5 and XJ2 300PL6. If still
not OK after, replace 300PL5 board
# ACTION 2) SCHEMATICS book 300PL6 1/14 B5. Connect a
meter (DC) between TP20 300PL6 and TP42 300PL19
at the test activation, the measured voltage must be approx. 1.6 V
for 4 Amp reference.
Change the reference in the test. Approximate value at TP20 is 2.5
V for 5 Amp reference.
If measured voltage is out by +/- 30% replace 300PL5 or 300PL6.
>>> If HEAT_ON & TP20 (reference) are both OK, go to section 4-

3-2.
==============================================
In SM rev 2 issued in january 97, there is a schematics of the HV
tank illust 4-79 page 4-89

4-3-2 Heater test: DS3 F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HEAT: <00286>

300PL11 lit (“open" fila-
ment) # ACTION: Reset the seno to get DS2 or DS3 leds off.
From screen <00286 > press first trigger (auto test being always
selected to NO).
>>> If DS2 300PL6 8/14 (overload) turns on, go to section 4-3-2.

If DS3 300PL6 8/14 (open filament) turns on, the cause can be:
1) Q1 or Q2 are in short circuit: check of the two transistors:

On 300PL11 1/3 Measure the DC voltage between TP8 & TP11:
DC_BUS (source in 300PL9 1/8 F1).
Measure between TP8 & TP10. The voltage must be DC_BUS
divided by two. If not replace 300PL11.
2) There in no load at the T4 secondary (filament opened or HV
cable no connected).
HINT: There is no danger for the heater inverter to load the second-
ary by a short circuit (look at SM CAL001 3/6 for pin identification.
3) The output on the inverter is opened (heater transformer primary
is not supplied)
Check the connection of cable between 300PL11 J2 & the HV tank.

Also check that heater transformer
is not open (disconnect cable connected to J2 of 300-PL11) and
measure with an ohmeter
between pins 3 & 9 for Track1, pins 3 & 12 for Track2)
It is possible to load (simulation to check if heater inverter is OK) the

inverter by a short circuit.
However wave shape is very different but in this simulation we are
looking for Heater detection in the test.
For this simulation make a jumper between anode of CR4
300PL11& CR14 anode. See SCHEMATICS 300PL11 1/3
>>> To check the gate signals, go to section 4-3-2-1.

4-3-2-1 heater test: check of F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HEAT: <00286>

presence gate signals.
THEORY: WHAT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW:
Look at SCHEMATICS 300PL11 1/3
If the detection of current in the primary of the heater transformer is
less than (?) the inverter is stopped immediatly by the EPLD. Con-
sequently in this case, there is only one pulse at each test activa-
tion.
In fact if we activate the test several times, one time Q1 is controlled
and Q2 the next command.
The duration of the gate pulse is approxi 80 micro sec if the heater
function is OK.
When there no sufficient detection by the secondary of T3 the pulse
duration is only 25 micro sec.
PROCEDURE TO VIZUALIZE THE GATE COMMAND: !!!!!!!!!
BE VERY CAREFUL: DANGER if you leave the DC_BUS potential

present on 300PL11. Thefore:
REMOVE THE CABLE FROM THE PLUG J3 of 300PL11 board.
# ACTION:
Q1: COMMAND Connect the scope probe at TP12 and ground to
TP10 300PL11. Select auto mode 20 micro sec/div 5V/div. Increase
strongly the beam luminosity of the scope.
From the screen <00286 > press the first trigger. Retry this com-
mand several time according to the scope performance. The pulse
must be approx. 25 ms.
Q2 COMMAND: Do the same thing with probe at TP9 and ground

to TP8 300PL11
4-3-3 Heat test: Heater over- THEORY: This led goes on when more than 3 pulses are needed.
load: DS2 300PL11 is lit_

4-4 BIAS Function -CPU . With Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM Ter-
TEST description minal software running, from
@00287 application mode, select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/BIAS
BIAS_OK also checked in GEN_INTERFACE INPUT. No TP on
300PL5 but look at 300PL6 10/14 led DS12
The test is OK if Bias detection signal (BIAS_OK) goes to YES and
stays.
- Signification of AUTOTEST: when auto test is selected to YES, an

error code is displayed if the test is not OK, and the test command
is removed by the CPU.
Therefore, SELECT AUTOTEST TO NO to troubleshoot.
# ACTION 1) check connection cable W4 between J3 300PL5 and

J2 300PL6
From screen <00287 > press first trigger. If test not OK check
power supply of bias inverter:
See SCHEMATICS book 300PL11 2/3 at B4. Check TP3 (+12V) &
TP6 (-12V).
The source of +/- 15 V is on 300PL17 p 1/3. +15V is transmitted by
contact 3-2 of X1 relay.
-15 V is transmitted by contact 4-3.
# ACTION 2) Connect a scope (or a DC meter) between ground

(TP42 300PL17) and TP42 300PL6.
from screen <00287> Press the first trigger: The logic level must
trigger to “0" (level “1" is +5V when test inactive)).
3) Connect a scope without memory between TP44 300PL6 and

ground (take a screw which
secures the board to the chassis) 0.2 ms /div.
The period is approx 0.4 ms at 30 Volt reference (default value in
the test).
Press the first trigger. The signal must be a square signal of + 5 Volt
amplitude.
>>> If both command signals are OK present go to section 4-5."
>>> If one of the two (or both) signal(s) (TP42 TP44) is (are) not
present, go to section 4-4-1.

4-4-1 Bias test :TP42 300PL6 These two signals are the bias command from interface.
not OK, Signal at TP44
300PL6 is not present F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/BIAS
ALWAYS CONFIGURE BBIAS AUTOTEST TO “NO" TO TROU-

BLESHOOT
See SCHEMATICS 300PL6 2/14 A4: TP44
For reminder TP44 can be visualized with an scope without mem-

ory: 0.2 ms /div.
The period is approx 0.4 ms at 30 Volt reference (default value in
the test).
From screen <00287> Press the first trigger.
The signal must be a square signal of + 5 Volt amplitude.
If the bias test becomes “active" when pressing the first trigger and
the frequency signal in not present
at TP44, replace 300PL5 board.
=========================================
In SM rev 2, issued in January 97 there is a schematic of the HV
4-5 Bias test: TP42 300PL6 F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/BIAS: <00287>

OK, TP44 300PL6 OK
(command from interface At this stage the inverter receives command:
OK)
# ACTION 1 Check the presence of gate command of the transistor
bias: See SCHEMATICS book 300PL11 2/3
Check again voltage at TP3 & TP6 on 300PL11.
Connect a scope without memory in auto mode 1V / Div 0.5 ms /div
probe to TP4 and
ground to TP1.
From the screen <00287 > press the first trigger.
pulses of 5 volts must be present.
Repeat the same measurement with TP2.
If there is no pulses replace 300PL11.
HINT: There is a easy way to detect if the inverter works (ignore the
accuracy of the measurement).
Connect a meter (fluke) in AC mode across R33 at E9)
Select the reference at maximum (320 V).
Activate the test: the measured value is approx. 3.6 Volts.

5 GRAPHY (Theory) Expo- In application, there are three exposure modes. Of course the user
sure modes. must select one of them before
making the preparation.
1) MANUAL MODE: The user select KV value and mAs value.
2) AEC MODE: The user select only the KV and the Auto Exposure
Control controls terminates the
exposure when the optical density target is reached.
3) AOP MODE: The system automatically chooses the technique of

exposure (KV value & filter)
according to the computation of the pre-exposure.
Options a) CNT (contrast): The system chooses the “minimum" of

KV, taking in consideration the
available mAs value.
b) STD (Standard). The system makes a compromise between con-
trast and dose.
c) DOSE: The system chooses “higher" KV to reduce the dose.
MAGNIFICATION EXPOSURE: See also TSG section 3-9 for dif-

ference between 700T & 800T.
A mag view can be made in the three modes: 1) Manual 2) AEC

mode 3) AOP mode.
Never use a grid to make a mag view. Consequently use a cassette
holder. See TSG section 8-3 for more info
>>> go to section 5-1 to continue.
>>> If nothing happens when pressing the second trigger button, go

to section 5-1.

5-1 Graphy command (gra- The 700T/800T has an interlock board to inhibit the prepa and gra-
phy switch & room door phy when the door of X-ray room is
interlock check) opened.
Look at IST005 in SM 2/6 for block diag. Look at SCHEMATICS

book 300PL9 7/8 at 6D and 300PL14
See the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST to check if the CPU sees

the command of the buttons from the
console
To use GENE_INTERFACE INPUT TEST, do the following:
. With laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM Ter-

minal software running,
select from application mode: F10 / F9 / SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/
1>2/INTG

REMINDER: In this test, only status of PREP must change when
pressing PREP button
or GRAPHY when pressing graphy button.

5-2 kV GENERATION - “Glo- THEORY OF THE HV TEST: There are three different tests to test
bal" high voltage CPU the HV:
TEST description 1) The HIGH VOLTAGE TEST: screen < 00306> call it “global" test
.
2) The SCR's GATE DRIVE TEST: screen <00305> See section
52442
3) The SHORT-CIRC INVERTER TEST screen <00304> See sec-
tion 52441
- For each test, the tube filament is off.
- With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and

select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HV/HV from Application mode.
>>> Check the following screen status in stand-by mode:

All signal status must be as indicated in the illustration.
#: ACTION: Press the Exposure button. The HV test is OK when:

1) HV_OK must trigger to YES and KV_SUP_5 to YES and stay
during test activation.
2) LL_SECURITY & HL_SECURITY signals must stay to NO.
3) Arcing number must stay to 0 (Zero).
# ACTION: If the test is OK at 22KV, change the KV REF and try

the maximum of KV to check if there is no Arcing detected for KV
greater than 22.
==================================================
===================================
In SM rev 2 issued in January 1997, there is a schematics of the HV

5-2-1 ARCING: includes also a F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/HV/HV

cause of S02 message
A) DURING HV TEST:
If activation of the HV test generates arcings (“tube" spits).

The cause is due to the X-ray tube or the HV tank or the HV cable.
To determine what is the cause:
1) Disconnect the HV cable from the HV tank, put some oil.
Run the HV test at different HV values. If there is no arcings
detected it means the cause is the X-ray tube or the HV cable.
2) If the HV tank is ok (determined by config 1).
Reconnect the HV cable to the tank. Disconnect the HV cable from
the housing tube.
Set the cable in a safety position (far from any risks to touch the
equipment or People.
Very carefully, run the HV test again. If there is no arcing in this
configuration, the X-ray tube is the arcing cause.
B) IN APPLICATION MODE: S02 MESSAGE.
One of the cause of arcing in application (when the HV test does

not generate arcing message ) is due
mA too high. Explanation is that there is a detection of mA max (low
Level security). Consequently
the inverter is stopped for about 20 ms and then the CPU re-starts
the command. After seven (7) attempts,
the CPU stops the exposure and generates a S02 message.
# Perform CAL003 of the SM.

5-2-2 HV_OK status in inactive HV_OK SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURATIONS:

HV test. " signal “path 1) In the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT /
MAINT / GEN / 1>2 / INT
2) In the HV TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT / MAINT / GEN / HV/HV
a) when test is inactive (this the same check than the GEN_INTERF
INPUT).
b) during test activation.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
“Path" of this signal from origin is approximately:
HV_OK_OUT is generated by EPLD U23 300PL8 8/10 E10. This
signal is sent into two directions:
1) To HV_OK TP on pin 9 of R7 (R7 R8 R9 are three bar strips of
ten TPs each, located in the area of TP30
Then HV_OK is sent to Interface board 300PL5 via U22. See error
006/003 for more info.
>>> go to section 5-2-3 to see the location of test points R7 R8 R9

on 300PL8 2/10 B9
2) To a gate U18 300PL8 6/10 which generates TIMEOUT REGUL

if the actual KV does not reach the KV
reference in 8 ms after beginning of exposure in application mode
or HV test.
WHEN TEST IS INACTIVE: If HV_ OK = “YES" replace 300PL8.
Note: This “HV_OK" signal is not included in the two sub-tests:

SHORT-CIR inverter test and
SCR's GATE TEST because by design of the test there is no HV
generated. By the way, SCR remains
from the DMR. In the 700T/800T the HV is controlled by IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor).
>>> go to section 5-2-2-1 to continue with active test.

5-2-2-1 HV_OK: Explanation of WHAT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW ABOUT SIGNALS RELATED

HV signal timing & 006/ TO HV:
003
Timing of “HV" signals from beginning of exposure.
SCW: (Security Cut Wire) means no current is detected in the pri-

mary of HV transformer.
Therefore no HV can be present.
KV_SUP_5: means a current is detected in the primary of HV trans-

former, but no HV is detected
across the internal blinder in the HV tank.
HV_OK: means the actual KV reaches the KV ref. The time of sta-
tus change of this signal depends
of the DC_BUS voltage and tube load. The timeout to generate the
error is 006/003 is 20 ms.
(The occurrence of this error is very low).
TIMEOUT_REGUL: is an error generated if the actual KV does not

reach the KV ref in a timeout of 8 ms.
. Connect a scope to the test point pin 9 of R7 on 300PL8

. If HV_OK doesn't switch to “1" before 20ms after XRAY_ON, but
no timeout regul replace 300-PL8 Bd.
>>> go to section 5-2-2-2 to see the location of bar strip test points
on 300PL8

5-2-2-2 Location of the three bar These three bar strips are shown in SCHEMATICS 300PL8 2/10 A9
strips (R7 R8 R9) & TP30 C10 C10
on 300PL8 layout |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| R7 ________
| 10 | R8 | U23 |
| | | R9 | EPLD |
| | | | |____ ___|
||||
||||
||||
||||
||||
||||
|1|||
|||
| TP30 |
| _____________________________
|___________J2________________|
|_____________________________________________________
_________________________________

5-2-3 KV_SUP_5 in inactive HV HV_OK SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURATIONS:

test (KVSUP5 TP on
300PL5) 1) In the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT /
a) when test is inactive (this the same check than the
GEN_INTERFACE INPUT).
EXPLANATION OF KV_SUP_5 signal: This signal is a safety to
stop the inverter if there is no HV
detected at the internal divider inside the HV tank in a time
approximately 1ms after beginning of exposure (or HV test)
-------------------------------------------------
----------------------
On 300PL8 6/10 TP6 (must be at “0" logic ( 0.380 +/- 120 mV) when
test is inactive.
On 300PL8 6/10 C9 KV_SUP_5_OUT becomes Test point 6 of R7
(R7 R8 R9 are three bar strips of ten
test points each, located in the area of TP30 (GND).
TP 6 of R7 is sent to 300PL5 (interface board) via U28 of 300PL8
and become TP KVSUP5
When no HV detected (standby for example). KVSUP5 must be
equal to “0" logic (less than 300 mV)
- Check signal KV_MEAS on TP9 of 300-PL8 HV CTRL Bd. Use a
scope with synchro on G1CMD1
(TP3 of 300-PL8 Bd). The command is on falling edge. The signal is
< 1V.
- Check signal KV_SUP_5 on TP6 of R8 on 300-PL8 Bd. Use a

scope with the same sync. as previously.
The signal KV_SUP_5 must be inactive in stand-by mode:
>>> If signal KV_SUP_5 doesn't switch to NO, go to section 5-2-3-1
to troubleshoot.

5-2-3-1 KV_SUP_5: KVSUP5 TP # ACTION: From Screen <00306> press the first trigger.
on 300PL5 stays to “0" If KV_SUP_5 does not switch to “YES" Check connection of coaxial
after HV test activation. cable W21 between
300-PL15- HIGH VOLTAGE MEASURE Bd (J1) on HV TANK and
300-PL8 HV CTRL Bd (J4).
WARNING: On the 300PL9 produced before 1997 the potential of

incoming line is still present even in keep
alive status. See 300PL9 in renewal part list chapter for more info.
THEORY REMINDER: HV function technology is “very" different

between a 700T/800T and a SENIX or a DMR.
With a Senix or a DMR, KV less than 5 can be due to a failure of HV
inverter.
with a 700T/800T If there is no SCW error, it means that the HV
inverter is OK and
then KV_SUP_5 is wrong because the HV is not detected:
HV divider opened inside the tank, or X-ray tube making a short cir-
cuit etc.
# ACTION
Check signal MEAS_KV on TP9 of 300-PL8 Bd.

Use a scope with synchro on G1CMD1 (TP3 of 300-PL8 Bd). Trig-
gering is on the falling edge.
The signal must be > 1V:

5-2-4 HL_SECURITY: What is WHAT HL_SECURITY MEANS: A “Fatal" security that removes
a High Level security? command of the inverter.
HL_SECURITY SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURA-

TIONS:
1) In the GEN_INTERFACE INPUT TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT /

INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
This signal is bad if one or more of the following signals are bad:
1) SUPPLY DEFECT >>>
2) EXPOSURE TIME OUT
3) TIME OUT REGUL
4) SCW (Security cut wire)
Of course, in terms of failure, a HL security is most of the time the

consequence of one of the four previous signals.
HL security is generated by the EPLD U23 on 300PL8.
5-2-4-1 SUPPLY_DEFECT (HL SUPPLY DEFECT takes the wrong status during an exposure if
security) one of the three signals become wrong:
1) MAINS_OK: look at 300PL9 2/8 B10 for origin. See also TSG
section 2-2.
2) DC_BUS: Look at 300PL9 3/8 B9 DC_MEAS for origin. See also
TSG section 2-2
3) LVPS_OK: Look at 300PL6 6/14 E/8 DS6 led for origin.
SUPPLY_DEFECT: SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGU-

RATIONS:

INPUT).

5-2-4-2 EXPOS_TIME_MAX (HL EXPOS_TIME_MAX SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGU-

security) RATIONS:

INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
Check in the install menu, what is the select value of exposure time
max.
path: Setup / install / config / config / T_max
. Try to reproduce the problem (perform exposures with 22 kV SF

and 360 mAs) and check if
exposure is longer than 21s using a watch:
. If exposure is longer than 21s, then there is a problem with CPU
clock; replace 300-PL4 CPU Bd.
(Exposures should be automatically stopped by the CPU after 21
seconds if necessary).
. If exposure is stopped at 21s; then there is a regulation problem

with 300-PL8 HV CTRL Bd.
Replace 300-PL8 Bd.
. If the problem remains, and the “Gene_Soft_PRES" LED is ON,

replace 300-PL5 Interface Bd.

5-2-4-3 TIMEOUT_ REGUL (HL What is TIMEOUT_REGUL: In application mode this error gener-
security) ated when the actual KV does not reach KV ref in 8 ms after begin-
ning of exposure. Look at 300PL8 6/10
in the CPU tests TIME OUT_ REGUL SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN

THREE CONFIGURATIONS:

a) when test is inactive (this the same check than the
GEN_INTERFACE INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
1) WHEN HV TEST IS INACTIVE (or in
GENE_INTERFACE_INPUT)
Look at 300PL8 5 / 10 D10. " AR " signal (TP16) means Auto Regul.
This signal asks for inverter command at the beginning of exposure

and during HV regulation.
# ACTION: Connect a DC meter between TP16 & TP30 (GND).

When the HV test is inactive, this signal must be + 5 V.
If this TP16 = 0V Replace 300PL8 board.
>>> go to section 5-2-4-3-1 to continue the test.

5-2-4-3-1 Timeout_regul: DC_BUS THEORY: This signal is YES (bad status) for two reasons:
measurement & KV regu- 1) When the actual kv does not reach the reference in a time out of
lation 8 ms after beginning of exposure
2) During exposure when more than four cycles are not enough to
reach the reference.
Evidently this signal has more risk to occur at the maximum of

power (30KV with 100mA) because the
actual voltage of the DC bus can be to low. For reminder, the DC
Voltage is Approximately 1.4 times the
incoming line. During exposure, the drop of the DC bus is bigger if
the line resistance is high.
So, Compare the status of this signal in each of the following 3 con-
figurations:
1) Make an exposure In application mode 30KV GF. (3 KW)

2) Make an exposure in application mode 22KV SF.
3) Run the HV test (Reminder: The tube filament is off in the HV
test).
# ACTION: Check all connections related to the DC bus are cor-

rectly tighten. (output 300PL9, connections
on the capacitor of 4700 micro farads etc.).
If no improvement, check the line resistance by performing
CAL015: “checking the mains
supply for a full power use"

5-2-4-4 SCW (No current in HV . THEORY: A wrong status of signal SCW can be detected only if
INVERTER) (HL Secu- previously “x ray on" went active.
rity) SCW means: Security Cut Wire. Two configurations of causes:
1) The two gates of IGBT of one inverter branch are triggered, but
there in no feedback of inverter
current.
2) The two IGBTs do not receive the signal on their gates, and there
is no inverter current feedback.
# ACTION: From the screen <00306 > Press second trigger in the
HV test
In the case of SCW = YES do the following checks:
- Check the connection of the ribbon cable W19 between XJ1
300PL10 and XJ3 300PL8
- See SCHEMATICS book 300PL10 2/3: Check that following
screws are correctly tightened:
M3 300PL10 GKA/2 & GKA/1 tank M5 300PL10, M4, M1, etc.;
check if L1 is not opened.
Run the HV test again:
IF SCW is still = YES continue with following checks:
See SCHEMATICS book 300PL10 2/3:

# ACTION: With a DC meter, caliber 500 V or 1000V measure the
voltage between TP8 & TP9 300PL10
(DC_BUS) and write down the value.
Measure the value between TP8 & TP16. It must be equal to the
half of DC_BUS previously measured.
. If voltage is equal to OV, then IGBT Q7 or Q12 are in short-circuit;

replace 300-PL10 Bd.
. If voltage is equal to DC_BUS, then IGBT Q6 or Q3 are in short-
circuit; replace 300-PL10 Bd.
>>> If 300PL10 is OK and SCW still = YES at the HV test activation,

go to section 5-2-4-4-1.
>>> If after these checks, SCW is still = YES, when running the test
go to section 5-2-4-4-1 to troubleshoot.
(ON 300-PL5 Interface Bd, the signal _SCW goes low: U25-11 =
OV).

5-2-4-4-1 SCW checked with HV This HV sub-test is used to know is SCW fault is due to the HV tank
SHORT TEST: (To deter- or to the inverter.
mine if inverter is OK)
# ACTION 1: Configure the hardware as following:
Remove the wire connected to GKA/2 on the tank and reconnected
it to GKA/1.Then the
output of inverter is in short circuit (do not worry, it is not dangerous
for the equipment).
# ACTION 2: from the screen < > Run the short test.
If SCW stays to NO after activation of this test, it means the inverter

is OK.
By deduction, HV tank is probably the cause.
>>> If SCW = YES, go to section 5-2-4-2 to continue.
5-2-4-4-2 SCW: HV sub-CPU This HV sub test is used to visualize the IGBT gates with no DC bus
TEST: " GATES " (pulse voltage on 300 PL10.
presence) DANGEROUS
IF... WARNING WARNING WARNING: FOR EQUIPMENT WORKING
WELL, THIS TEST IS DANGEROUS IF the inverter output is in
short circuit (hardware configuration to run the “short" test) and the
DC bus voltage is present on 300PL10.
The reason is that the inverter operates at maximum frequency until
you release the second trigger.
The SHORT CIRCUIT test is not dangerous in any configuration
because the IGBTs are controlled by burst.
PROCEDURE TO CHECK THE IGBT gate commands:
This check is difficult to perform if your scope in not performant,

because if the inverter is not OK the
system sends only one pulse command.
The period of the command pulse is only 2 micro sec. Use X-RAY
signal to trigger the scope.
Beginning of the pulse on gate transformer is about 15 micro sec
after the X-RAY_ON signal.
Note: Gate commands are much easier to visualize in the short cir-
cuit test because there are an
pulse train during 500 micro sec but ONLY if the inverter is OK. If
the inverter operation is OK,
there is no interest to troubleshoot the gate commands!)

5-2-5 LL_SECURITY: What is a This “no fatal" security removes the command of inverter. After 20
Low Level security? ms, the system again commands
the inverter. If there is a new detection of one LL security, the sys-
tem again stops the inverter command.
After six attempts, the CPU terminates the exposure.
LL_SECURITY SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURA-

TIONS:

INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
-----------------------
This signal is bad if one or more of the following signals are bad:
1) I_CONV_MAX = inverter current maximum >>> go to section 5-
2-5-1 for info about I_CON_MAX
2) HV_DROPOUT
3) HV_MAX
4) MA_MAX
5-2-5-1 I_CONV_MAX (LL secu- I_CONV_MAX SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURA-

rity) TIONS:

INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
----------------------
“Path" of this signal from origin is approx:
On 300PL10 1/3 secondary of T2 (loaded by R14).
300PL8 7/10 TP1. 300 PL8 8/10 EPLD U23. Then 300PL5.
1) WHEN HV TEST IS INACTIVE: (or in GEN_INTERFACE INPUT

test).
# ACTION: Look at 300PL8 7/10 F4 Connect a DC meter between

TP1 & TP30 (GND).
The voltage must be 0 Volt.

5-2-5-2 HV_DROP_OUT (LL This “no fatal" signal has the wrong status (YES) when the actual
security) HV significantly drops.
HV_DROP_OUT SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURA-

TIONS:

INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
-----------------------
On 300PL8 6/10 A8 TP15.
300PL8 8/10 EPLD U13. Then 300PL5
1) WHEN HV TEST IS INACTIVE (or in GEN_INTERFACE INPUT).
# ACTION: Look at 300PL8 6/10 A8. Connect a DC meter between

TP15 & TP30 (GND).
The measured value must be approx. 380 mV.
5-2-5-3 HV_MAX (LL security) This “no fatal" signal has the wrong status (YES) when the actual
KV value detected is greater than
40 KV.
HV_OK SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURATIONS:

2) In the HV TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT / MAINT / GEN / HV
INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
-----------------------
On 300PL8 6/10 D8 TP7. EPLD U13 on 300PL8, then 300PL5.
# ACTION: Look at SCHEMATICS book 300PL8 6/10 HV_MAX_IN

signal = TP7.
Connect a meter between TP7 and TP30 (GND).
In stand-by the voltage at the common point of R17 R27 is 0 volt

(No HV), then HV_MAX TP7 must be equal to approximately 380
mV.

5-2-5-4 MA_MAX (LL security) This “no fatal" security means that the mA detected are greater than
127 mA.
MA_MAX SIGNAL IS CHECKED IN THREE CONFIGURATIONS:

2) In the HV TEST: F10 / F9 / MAINT / MAINT / GEN / HV
a) when test is inactive (this is the same check as the
GEN_INTERF INPUT).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
“Path" of this signal from origin is approximately.
On 300PL8 3/10 E10 MA_MAX_IN = TP32. EPLD U13 on 300PL8
then 300PL5
1) WHEN HV TEST IS INACTIVE (or in GENE_INTERFACE INPUT

TEST)
# ACTION: On 300PL8 connect a DC meter between TP32 & TP30

(GND). The measured voltage must be approx. 270 mV.
2) WHEN HV TEST IS ACTIVE:

To get the bad status of this signal in the HV test does not make
sense, because the tube filament is OFF in the HV test.

5-3 mA measure feedback - Note: This test is a check of the calibration given in CAL016 of the
CPU TEST description Service manual.

MAMMOCOM Terminal software running, from Application mode,
select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/mA-mes.
# ACTION: Look at SCHEMATICS book 300PL8 3/10 at B4.

Remove the jumper SK1.
Connect a milliamp meter 200mA DC scale between TP40 & TP39
(will display approx.100mA)
Read on the laptop the displayed value:
If the difference between milliamp meter reading and the laptop

reading is less than 2.4 ma, calibration is OK.
# ACTION If the difference is greater than 2.4 mA: perform CAL016

of the SM.
Note: The accuracy of this calibration is very crucial. It is absolutely

impossible to get the correct mA
by performing CAL003 if CAL016 is not correct.

6 AEC Mode (HV Photo - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and
tube BOARD) - CPU MAMMOCOM Terminal software running, select F10/F9/MAINT/
TEST description MAINT/GENE/1-->2/PM from Application mode.
. It selects PM BOARD MAINTENANCE TEST screen:
1) HV PM: This part of the test allows to check if the displayed HV

PM value is the same than the actual value measured with an exter-
nal meter. This is a way to check results of CAL004 of SM.
2) PM current: This part of test displayed the offset current (hertz).

Offset is the addition of two values:
a) An " artificial " value created on the 200PL5 board.
b) Dark current of the phototube.
AUTOTEST signification: When " AUTOTEST" is configured to

“YES" via F6 error messages are displayed.
To make measurements on hardware, configure " AUTOTEST" to
“NO" via F6
(No messages are displayed).
Note: To change test configuration or exit the test, it is necessary to

press “OFF" (F4) first, if the test
is active.
ADVICE: Check the HV PM before the offset current

>>> To check the HV PM, go to section 6-1.

6-1 PM test: Phototube high Path: F10/F9 / MAINT/MAINT/GENE/1>2/PM

voltage check
# ACTION: Remove the top cover of the image receptor (8 screws).
200PL5 is shown in SM DR032 3/4
See SCHEMATICS book 200PL5. Connect a DC voltmeter 100V

caliber between TP1 (ground) & TP2.
(TP1 is approximately at the middle of the board).
# ACTION: From screen <00292> configure auto test to “NO" press

F3 (ON) (HVPM default value ref is 300 V
If the measured voltage on the meter is 0 V check the presence of
the jumper J2 on 200PL5.
Check also power supplies VCC (+5V) + 15VF -15VF.
The source of these three voltages comes from 300PL5 via cable
connected in J8.
On 300PL5 the 3 test points and leds are in the same area next
between J8 and J10.
PROCEDURE TO CHECK IF LOAD OF DC/DC CONVERTER

OUTPUT IS OK
THEORY: The output of the DC/DC converter is loaded by a serie
of 10 resistors:
9 resistors (1% tolerance) of 100 K and 1 of 150 K. Total = 1 meg
and 50 K (1050 K ohms)
# ACTION: Remove the HV PM cable from J1 of 200PL5. With an

ohmeter measure the impedance
between the cable and TP1 on 200PL5 (ground).
If the value is less than 950 K or greater than 1.150 Meg replace the
photocell assembly.
>>> To check PM current offset (IPM) go to section 6-2.

6-2 PM test: Photo tube cur- Path: F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/1>2/PM

rent check THEORY: An “artificial " offset is created on 200PL5. The measured
offset is the sum of this artificial offset
+ photo tube dark current. The offset must be in window 800 Hz <
offset < 2400 Hz.
037/003 is generated for offset value out of this window.
Average normally found is between 1300 & 1400 hz.
Of course in AEC/AOP exposure, this offset is subtracted from the
PM current integration value.
# ACTION: Check the cable (made of two wires) is connected to J3

of 200PL5 and HV PM cable in J1
From screen <00292> Configure auto test to " N0"
Press F3 (ON) to activate the test.
If the measured offset = 0 Check connections between J8 300PL5

& J4 200PL5 and power supplies.
If still a pb: remove cable (made of two wires) connected to J3 of
200PL5 and run the test again.
If offset is in the window 800... 2400, replace the photocell assem-
bly.
If offset is still to 0 Hz replace 200PL5 board.
>>> In the case of 037/003 intermittent in application mode, look at

this error in error message list chapter
Note: A tool to troubleshoot this function is expected for 1997. The

philosophy is the same than the
existing tool for Senix “AEC mode diag kit

7 MEDICAL MENU: Comp Path from application mode is: setup/Medical. Layout of medical
speed & force, decomp, menu <00001> is:
height, aop, language,
cassette SPEED FORCE DECOMP HEIGHT AOP 1>2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
LANG CASSETTE 2>1
F1 F2 F6
SPEED: Choice of speed for compression between fast or slow.

FORCE: Choice of maximum compression force in application. F1
increases force. F2 decreases. F3 valids
DECOMPRESSION: Choice of automatic decompression after
exposure.
HEIGHT: Choice of the height where the paddle stops after an auto-
matic decompression after exposure.
The maximum selectable is 20 cm.
AOP: Use this menu to program the maximum drop of optical den-
sity. >>> See also S12 error message
Path is: Setup/medical/AOP Note: Acces is not possible if the SFC
is not calibrated.
The layout menu is: MAX DROP IN O.D FOR xxxxxx: x.xx
+ - FSC
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
xxxxxx is the FSC name, x.xx is the selected drop value.

Select the maximum desired drop by using F1 (+) or - keys.
LANG: language selection. Choice between English French Deuts
Espan Itali Portug

8 Miscellaneous: “TROU- ELEVATOR:

BLESHOOTING" when a) In application mode the elevator is locked when the compression
no error code is dis- force detected is greater than 3 daN.
played: ELEV ROT
COMP b) At power on, the paddle is not driven to home position. Therefore
the elevator and the arm rotation can be (does not occur at each
power up) locked if we do not command a decompression.
c) Elevator does not move if its motor is disconnected and there is

no error code.
ARM ROTATION:
a) In application mode the elevator is locked when the compression
force detected is greater than 3 daN.
b) At power on, the paddle is not driven to home position. Therefore

the elevator andthe arm rotation can be does not occur at each
power up) locked if we do not command a decompression)
COMPRESSION: If the compression

1) moves in both directions for a short distance,
2) gets an actual and significant compression force but, there is no

force displayed.
3) and the system does not generate error code.
Then the calibration is probably wrong
# Perform CAL019 in Service manual: CALIB compression of force

detector.

8-1 LAPTOP. Mammocom >>> Connect the laptop.

software See job card SM IST003 P. 4/4.The “MAINT" plug is just below the
output of the cable.
On site, when the laptop is connected to the seno for running CPU
test we need an easy way to toggle
from this application to the alive layout test. Do the following:
1) From program manager, open this application ONLY ONE TIME

(one window). If by mistake the application
is opened a second time (another window) the laptop will display
messages like: “No more table
handles available" or “Link has not been connected successfully".
In this case you need to click on " OK "
as many times needed (can be 10 to 15) to reach the box of pass-
word entering. Click on cancel.
2 ) Open mammocom.
3) TO TOGGLE FROM ASM TO MAMMOCOM & vice versa, main-
tain ALT key and press TAB key as
many times as needed until you visualize the “application" you
want, then release the ALT key.
(The minimum of windows is three: Program manager, mammo-
com, ASM).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
If there is no connection with the seno, check the setup of “commu-
nication parameters". See “mammocom" chapter 6. To resume for
700T/800T: Baud rate: 9600. Parity: Even. Length: 07, Stop bits:
01.
==================================================
===================================
Look at Renewal part list to get the part number of mammocom
software.

8-2 INSITE: TSG when no A) NO CONNECTION TO THE GENERIC EDM: (The following
connection to the generic equipment is installed mostly in the USA)
EDM & multi room 1) Verify power is applied to the Generic EDM. Check the power
adapter kit (USA) indicator on the front of the EDM to
the right of the power switch. Verify that the EDM AC input power
selection switch, on the back of
the EDM, is set to the proper input power.
2) Check to make sure the phone line is connected to the RJ-11
telephone jack labeled “Line” on the back
of the EDM. The modem will not pick up if the phone line is plugged
into the jack labeled “Phone” on
the back of the EDM.
3) Verify that the hard drive light comes on, and then goes out after
three minutes, when the power to
the EDM is turned on. If the hard drive light is always on or off, the
EIDE disc controller board may
have become loose in the mother board socket. Remove the top
cover of the EDM and check to make
sure the controller board is seated properly. Check the controller
board carefully, it is difficult to
determine if the board is properly seated. At this time, check to
make sure that all of the other boards
and connections are seated properly. Replace the cover and power
up the EDM.
4) If the hard drive light is now flickering, wait 3 minutes, then try
connecting to the EDM again. A hard
drive light always on or off after this point will require the replace-
ment of the EDM. If the hard drive
and EDM seem to be in working order and there is still no answer,
verify that the phone line is active.
B) MULTI-ROOM ADAPTER KIT TROUBLESHOOTING:

1) Verify that the opto-isolator model 287 is used at the connection
to the EDM. The DTE/DCE switch must be set to " DCE" on the
model 287.
2) Verify that the opto-isolator model 255M is used at the connec-
tion to the Senographe.
The DTE/DCE switch must be set to “DTE" on the model 255m.
C) GENERIC EDM PART NUMBER: Go to renewal part list chapter
and request for EDM

8-3 IMAGE QUALITY: Effect BIAS EFFECT on Focus size: Theory & troubleshoot.
of bias on Focus size. If the bias voltage is very high (because a breakdown of this func-
Mag view (new cassette tion) the small focus size is out of tolerance. In the worst case, error
holder). AOP 023/006 (actual mA less than 50% of reference) is generated during
exposure.
THEORY: Inside the HV tank, the secondary of bias transformer is

loaded by a resistor R1 of 51.1 K 10 Watts. If this resistor is not con-
nected (opened, or poor soldering) the voltage is much higher than
the reference. For more theory look at Theory operation chapter.
SYMPTOM OF THIS PROBLEM: CAL002 (bias calibration) does

not work. Param ALPHA is much less than the default value (can be
40 times less) if previous calibration has been made with the pb of
opened secondary of bias voltage transformer.
If you have this symptom replace the HV tank. See job card SM DR
003 .
Do not forget to write default values of ALPHA & BETA in the install
menu before performing CAL002 (SM).
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
MAGNIFICATION VIEWS: To reduce the “dose" in mag view a new
cassette holder is available from beginning 97. This new cassette
holder has no top cover. Part number is 2174361.
WARNING: If this cassette holder with no top cover replaces a cas-
sette holder with top, Perform again CAL007 & CAL014.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
AOP: Effect of mechanical thickness: With introduction of 800T,
there is an improvement in AOP. The mechanical detected thick-
ness determines parameters for pre-exposure, BUT this thickness
is also taken in consideration for exposure parameters. In other
words AOP will choose a different exposure technique (KV,filter)
for two breasts with identical dose received during pre-exposure,
but different mechanical thickness.
With 700T, there is no thickness detected. The default value for

AOP is 5 cm and 50% composition.

8-4 OPTIONS DATAFLAH The dataflash is a device to print some data on the film in a window
of approximately 75 mm x 15 mm.
Data from dataflash itself: patient name, date, hospital name.
Data provided by the 800T:
1st group): Exposure mode: 2pts, AEC, AOP (for AOP also option is
also printed: Contrast Standard
Dose). KV, MAs, Focus filter.
2 nd group): Breast thickness, compression force, SID (always 660
for 800T), magnification, arm angulation.
DIALOGUE WITH SENO: The dataflash is connected to an external
plug on 700T/800T. See SM IST003 4/4.
Exposure data is transmitted to dataflash through a serial port. If the
dialogue in not OK, the dataflash
displays “Senographe error No system connected".
Use FLASHCOM SOFTWARE V1-10 P/N 2142716 (delivered with
each dataflash) to determine if the cause
is due to the seno or to the dataflash.
1) Run " laptop link test ": Connect laptop to plug A on dataflash and
check “Laptop link test". IF OK, do:
2) Remove the cable connected to plug B of dataflash (middle one).
Connect the laptop to plug B.
Check " Seno link test". If this test is OK it means the connection
problem is due to the seno or cable
Wiring of cable between seno and dataflash is pin 2 to pin 3, pin 3
to pin 2, pin 5 to pin 5.

8-8 Miscellaneous data about MODEL: 500T/600T 3phase & Senix | DMR V1 & DMR V2 | 700T/
700T/800T comparison to 800T
DMR & Senix -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------
ANODE: Molybdenum alloyed with Molybdenum alloyed with
Molybdenum alloyed
TARGET vanadium Vanadium on 1/2 anode with vanadium
MATERIAL Rhodium on 1/2 of Anode
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
TUBE PORT Berillium: 0.8 mm Molybdenum:0.03 mm Beryllium:
0.8 mm
MATERIAL Rhodium 0.025 mm
THICKNESS Aluminum: 1.0 mm
FOCUS SPOT LARGE: 0.3 not biased 0.3 not biased 0.3 not
biased
SIZE SMALL: 0.1 biased 0.1 biased 0.1 biased
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
FILTER Molybdenum: 0.03 mm Molybdenum: 0.03 mm 700T: Moly
0.03 mm
MATERIAL Aluminum: 1.00 mm Aluminum: 1.000 mm 800T: Moly
0.03 mm
THICKNESS Rhodium 0.025 800T: Rhodium 0.025 mm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
GRID RECIPROCATING: Yes removable Yes removable Yes
removable
GRID RATIO: 5:1 5:1 5:1
GRID FREQUENCY: 31 lines / cm 31 lines/ cm 31 lines / cm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
MAGNIFICATION: 1.5 and 1.85 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.5 1.8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------
SID: Ajustable 65 cm max Adjustable 66 cm max Fixed at 66 cm_

This page is blank.

Error Messages
CHAPTER 3 ERROR MESSAGES
1 INTRODUCTION
Any operational anomalies found by the system during Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition System oper-
ation are signalled by Error Messages. These may be displayed on the X-ray Console or on the Gantry
Readout. They may may indicate error or fault conditions requiring action from the GEMS Service engi-
neers.
If you need to call GEMS Field Service about an error, you should quote the entire message or mes-
sages, complete with any identification characters.
2 ERROR MESSAGES LIST

The following table lists error messages which may occur, with explanations and recommended actions.
- They are presented in alphanumerical order.
# MESSAGE SIGNIFICATION CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION
002/ E14 CPU or CPU software

001 INTERFACE error: VRTX error
Failure during init
002/ E14 CPU or CPU error: reboot Note:

002 INTERFACE by - It can happen if RESET Button is pressed.
Failure watch_dog_hard - Could be Real Time Clock failure.
or reset button - Could be Interrupt problem on Interface
Board.
002/ E14 CPU or CPU error: reboot

003 INTERFACE by
Failure watch_dog_soft
002/ E14 CPU or CPU error: reboot - Check the + 5Volts on 300PL4 CPU board.
004 INTERFACE after power + 5V must be 5 < V < 5.2
Failure micro-failure . See +5 V calibration procedure in Service
Manual: CAL024.
. If +5V is not OK, adjust LVPS potentiome-
ter.
. If still bad, replace 300-PL7 LVPS unit.
. If this error is still present after 300-PL7
replacement, replace 300-PL5 Interface
Board.
Note:
- If Power supply becomes < 4.70V, the con-
sole will be inactive. When P/S becomes >
4.75V, the CPU Board reboots.
- If it happens during a pose, it will be
stopped.
Errors.fm Page no. 85 Chapter 3

Error Messages
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: bus Note:

000 INTERFACE error - Could be CPU PROM (which contains soft-
Failure ware) failure.
- LED DS10 300PL4 (HALT) should be lit.
The generator is stopped.
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error:

001 INTERFACE address error
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: format

002 INTERFACE error
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: illegal

003 INTERFACE instruction
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: privi-

004 INTERFACE lege violation
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: trace

005 INTERFACE error
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: emu-

006 INTERFACE lation line 1010
Failure error
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: emu- Note:

007 INTERFACE lation line 1011 - Could be CPU PROM (which contains soft-
Failure error ware) failure.
- LED DS10 300PL4 (HALT) should be lit.
The generator cannot start.
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error: CHK

008 INTERFACE error
Failure
003/ E14 CPU or CPU error:

009 INTERFACE TRAPV error
Failure
004/ E14 CPU or 300-PL5 GENE

001 INTERFACE Interface: reset
Failure error
004/ E14 CPU or 300-PL5 GENE - Check yellow LED (FPGA_OK) on 300-PL5
002 INTERFACE Interface: read/ Interface Bd. It must be blinking one sec.
Failure write error on period. If not, replace 300-PL5 Bd.
timer PTM1 (U17)
Chapter 3 Page no. 86 Errors.fm

Error Messages
timer PTM1 (U17)
timer PTM2 (U18)
Failure write error on period.
timer PTM2 (U18) If not, replace 300-PL5 Bd.

006 INTERFACE Interface: inter-
Failure rupt error on
DUART1

007 INTERFACE Interface: PTM1
Failure (U17) timer 1
defective

defective

defective

defective

defective

defective

Error Messages

PTM1 (U17)
timer1

PTM1 (U17)
timer2

PTM1 (U17)
timer3

PTM2 (U18)
timer1
004/ E14 CPU or 300 PL5 GENE

PTM2 (U18)
timer2

PTM2 (U18)
timer3
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: Fault Run HV test. Default related to HL securities
000 tor Failure at exposure com-
mand
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: Fault

001 tor Failure at exposure com-
mand

Error Messages
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: signal This message means that there is no HV
002 tor Failure KV_INF_5 not ris- detected in a time out of 0.3 ms after the
ing command of the HV
inverter test.
TWO GROUPS OF CAUSES:

1) a) The HV inverter does not work properly
and of course, there is no HV at all.
b) The jumper TP25 on 300PL8 is not in
place. See SCH 300PL8 4/10 D7
2) The HV inverter operates correctly, but the
HV presence is not detected across the inter-
nal divider
inside the HV tank (or detection is transmitted
to the CPU)
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: Sig- This error means that the signal “HV_OK" is
003 tor Failure nal HV_OK not not received by the interface 300PL5 in a tim-
rising eout of 20 ms after the beginning of expo-
sure, but HV_OK was correct on 300PL8 6/
10 at gate U9 (300PL8 P/N 2132779).
If HV_OK was bad at gate U9

TIMEOUT_REGUL should be generated
after 8 ms and timeout_regul stops the expo-
sure.
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: fatal One of the causes of 006/004 is a no detec-
004 tor Failure security triggered tion of inverter current at the command of the
during exposure branch of IGBT.
In this case 079/005 is the consequence of
006/004.
See chapter 2 section 5-2-4-4.
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: fatal HV_ OK is generated by EPLD U23 300PL8
005 tor Failure security triggered
at end of expo-
sure or signal
HV_OK stay
'high'
006/ E01 Genera- Generator: signal See chapter 2 section 5-2-5

011 tor Failure LL_Security stays
'high' after 'arc-
ing recovery'

Error Messages
007/ E01 Genera- Gene init test: - Consult Error Codes buffer of the
001 tor Failure one fatal security Senographe using the Laptop Terminal and
input<>0; xxx MAMMOCOM software:
identifies input. . Select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/CODES/DIS-
See error log in PLAY menu to access this information.
CPU. The error code is expressed in a very similar
layout that in GEN_INTERFACE_INPUT.
The wrong status of signal is displayed in
reverse video.
reverse video.
- >>> If EXPOS_TIME_MAX = YES, go to
troubleshooting.
reverse video.
- >>> If TIMEOUT_REGUL = YES, go to trou-
bleshooting.
reverse video.
>>> If SCW = YES, go to troubleshooting.

Error Messages
reverse video.
>>> If I_CONV_MAX = YES, go to trouble-
shooting.
reverse video.
- >>> If HV_MAX = YES, go to troubleshoot-
ing.
reverse video.
>>> If MA_MAX = YES, go to troubleshoot-
ing.
CPU.
The error code is expressed in a very similar
reverse video.

Error Messages
xxx tor Failure one fatal security Senographe using the Laptop Terminal and
reverse video.
011/ E06 Software Focus bias soft-

001 Error ware error:
unknown com-
mand
011/ E06 Software Focus bias soft-

unknown task
status
012/ E02 Focus Focus bias: sig- This signal is related to led DS12 300PL6 10/
001 Bias Failure nal Bias_OK 14. This led must be OFF in stand-by.
'high' in standby
status
012/ E02 Focus Focus bias: sig- - Polarisation Go to chapter 2 section 4-4
002 Bias Failure nal Bias_OK stay primary circuit
'low' when bias is open on
generation starts 300-PL11
AUX PWR Bd.
- 300-PL6
AUX CTRL Bd
failure.
- _BIAS_ON
always inac-
tive.
- Polarization
circuit open
(secondary)
012/ E02 Focus Focus bias: sig- - 300-PL6 It means the current detected in the primary
003 Bias Failure nal Bias_OK AUX CTRL Bd of bias transformer significantly decreases
goes 'low' after failure. during
stabilization - _BIAS_ON preparation.
inactive.
012/ E02 Focus Focus bias: sig- - See chapter 2 section 4-4
004 Bias Failure nal Bias_OK stay
'high' when bias
generation
stopped

Error Messages
016/ E06 Software Anode stater soft-

unknown com-
mand
016/ E06 Software Anode stater soft-

unknown task
status
017/ E03 Rotor Anode starter: - 300-PL6 . Check cable W4 between 300-PL5-J3 (
001 Failure signal failure in AUX CTRL Interface Bd) and 300-PL6-J2 (AUX CTRL
standby status Bd. Bd).
. Check cable W8 between 300-PL6-J4 (AUX

CTRL Bd) and 300-PL9-J4 (POWER SUP-
PLY Bd).
017/ E03 Rotor Anode starter: - Power Fail- - Check fuse F2 on 300-PL9 POWER SUP-
003 Failure signal failure dur- ure on pulse PLY Bd:
ing acceleration transformer of . If fuse F2 is blown, disconnect W12 from
to 3000 300-PL12 300-PL11 & 300-PL12 Boards to detect a
ANODE short-cut.
STARTER Bd.
- Transistor(s) - Check cableW110 between 300-PL12-XJ2
T1-T2 in short- and X-Ray tube is connected.
circuit or open
on 300_PL12. If connected with the seno OFF, check with a
- One phase ohmmeter on 300-PL12, measure resistance
on stator is between TP14/TP15; TP14/TP16; TP15/
open. TP16. It must be equal to 19 ohms (it is two
- Short-Circuit wirings in series of the rotor motor) .
on stator. (PR,
PLA, PA = >>> Go to Rotor test
000, 011 or
101)

Error Messages

ing rotation at transformer of . If fuse F2 is blown, disconnect W12 from
3000 300-PL12 300-PL11 & 300-PL12 Boards to detect a
ANODE shortcut.
STARTER Bd.
- Transistor(s) - Check cable W110 between 300-PL12-XJ2
T1-T2 in short- and X-Ray tube is connected.
circuit or open If connected with the seno OFF, check with a
on 300_PL12. ohmmeter on 300-PL12, measure resistance
- One phase between TP14/TP15; TP14/TP16; TP15/
on stator is TP16. It must be equal to 19 ohms (it is two
open. wirings in series of the rotor motor).
- Short-Circuit
on stator. (PR, >>> go to Rotor test
PLA, PA =
001, 011 or
111)
ing rotation transformer of . If fuse F2 is blown, disconnect W12 from
(speed < 3000 300-PL12 300-PL11 & 300-PL12 Boards to detect a
rpm) ANODE short-circuit.
STARTER Bd. - Check cableW110 between 300-PL12-XJ2
- Transistor(s) and X-Ray tube is connected.
T1-T2 in short- If connected with the seno OFF, check with a
circuit or open ohmmeter on 300-PL12, measure resistance
on 300_PL12. between TP14/TP15; TP14/TP16; TP15/
- One phase TP16. It must be equal to 19 ohms (it is two
on stator is wirings in series of the rotor motor).
open.
- Short-Circuit >>> go to Rotor test
on stator.
017/ E03 Rotor Anode stater: sig- - 300-PL6 - Switch OFF/ON the senographe.
009 Failure nal failure during AUX CTRL
3000 rpm braking Bd. - TSG chapter 42
- 300-PL5
Interface Bd.
017/ K1 Rotorfail > K1 rotor security - - Check the following signals:

010 Power Shut- signal in standby STARTER_O
down status N active in . STARTER_PRES TP “ST_PRES" of 300-
stand-by PL5 Interface must be at " 1" logic in stand-by
mode, Bd trigger.
- 300-PL6 Reminder: logic “1" is approximately 4.010
AUX CTRL Volts on 300PL5.
Bd. . STARTER_ACCEL TP “ACCEL" of 300-PL5
- 300-PL5 Interface Bd must be at “1" in standby.
Interface Bd.

Error Messages
017/ K1 Rotorfail > K2 rotor security . Check cable W4 between 300-PL5-J3

011 Power Shut- signal in rotation (Interface Bd) and 300-PL6-J2 (AUX CTRL
down status Bd).
. Check STARTER_ACCEL signal: must be
inactive on TP “ACCEL" of 300-PL5 Interface
Bd in standby mode.
. If ACCEL signal is active, replace 300-PL6
AUX CTRL Bd;
021/ E06 Software Heater software

001 Error error: unknown
command
021/ E06 Software Heater software

task status
021/ E06 Software Heater software - Perform Heater scaling parameters calibra-
003 Error error: Heater tion Job Card CAL001 (see Service Manual),
scaling parame- then Heater Current calibration Job card
ters (ICH) or CAL003 (see Service Manual).
heater values are
not valid
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - Could be Error in Large focus:

001 ing Failure signal Heat_OK HEAT_ON Check if there is a similar error with the Small
Track 1 'high' in standby always active Focus (track 2).
status on 300-PL6 No TP on 300PL5 but look at 300PL11 10/14
AUX CTRL DS11. DS11 must be off in standby
Bd.

Error Messages

022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - HEAT_ON THEORY: Look at SCH book 300PL6 1/14
002 ing Failure signal Heat_OK always active A8 . This error means that the system sent
Track 1 stay 'low' when or inactive on HEAT_0N signal and there is no current (or
(Large Focus) heater started 300-PL6 AUX not enough) detected in the primary of heater
CTRL Bd. transformer.
- Strap cc5 on Try an exposure on Small focus to check if
300-PL6 the problem is common to both focus.
removed Check fuse F1 on 300-PL9 POWER SUPPLY
(Heating mA Bd:
measure- There are two VERY EFFICIENT SIMULA-
ment). TIONS to check where the circuit is open
- Transistors (assuming the command from interface is
on 300-PL11 OK.
AUX PWR Bd See issue 2) in TSG chapter 2 section 4-3-2:
are open or in Assuming the filament is opened:
short-circuit. Replace the filament by a wire directly con-
- Heater trans- nected between the pin of the HV cable (look
former is at SM CAL001 3/6 To identify commun pin LF
open. SF
See issue 3) in TSG chapter 2 section 4-3-2:
assuming the primary of hetaer transformer is
“opened" bad contacts for example. It is also
possible to load the heater inverter by a short
circuit. (the wave form is very different, but
the heater test runs OK in this configuration
(Heater detection = YES).
See chapter 2 section 4-3-2.
RUN THE HEATER TEST:

>>> Go to TSG chapter 2 section 4-3
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - HEAT_ON - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
003 ing Failure signal Heat_OK always active and 300-PL5 Boards.
Track 1 goes 'low' during or inactive on
pre-heater phase 300-PL6 AUX Run heater test chapter 2 section 4-3
CTRL Bd.
- Strap cc5 on
300-PL6
removed
(Heating mA
measure-
ment).
- Transistors
on 300-PL11
AUX PWR Bd
are open or in
short-circuit.
- Heater trans-
former is
open.

Error Messages

022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - Transistor - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
004 ing Failure signal Heat_OK short-cicuit and 300-PL5 Boards.
Track 1 goes 'low' during oon 300-PL11
1st trigger AUX PWR Bd. - Then go to Troubleshooting Guide chapter
2 section 4-3.
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - Transistor - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
005 ing Failure signal Heat_OK short-circuit on and 300-PL5 Boards.
Track 1 goes 'low' during 300-PL11
exposure AUX PWR Bd. - Run heater test chapter 2 section 4-3
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - signal AR This error means that the ma value in Large
006 ing Failure mA value not sig- (TP16 on 300- Focus seen by the CPU is less than 50% of
Track 1 nificant PL8 HV CTRL the reference.
Bd) not active Check presence of strap SK1 on 300-PL8 HV
(OV). CTRL Bd (Tube current measurement).
- Heater trans- . See SCH book 300PL8 3/10
former in
shortcut. - Check cable W21 (300-PL15-J1 HV MEA-
SURE Bd - 300-PL8-J4 HV CTRL Bd),
- Check cable W19 (300-PL8-J3 - 300-PL10-
J1 HV INV PWR Bd)
- Check also cable W11 between 300-PL11
and HV TANK.
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: Run heater test chapter 2 section 4-3.
007 ing Failure signal Heat_OK
Track 1 goes 'low' after
exposure
022/ E10/I21 Heat- Heater track 1: - Could be - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
008 ing Failure signal Heat_OK HEAT_ON and 300-PL5 Boards.
Track 1 stay 'high' when always active
heater stopped on 300-PL6 Run heater test chapter 2 section 4-3.
AUX CTRL
Bd.
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track - Error with Small focus.

001 ing Failure 2:(Small Focus) Check if a similar error occurs with Large
Track2 (Small signal Heat_OK Focus.
Focus) 'high' in stanby - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
status and 300-PL5 Boards.
No TP on 300PL5 but look at 300PL11 10/14

DS11 . DS11 must be off in standby.

Error Messages

023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track THEORY: Look at SCH book 300PL6 1/14
002 ing Failure 2:(small Focus) A8 . This error means that the system sent
Track2 (Small signal Heat_OK HEAT_0N signal and there is no current (or
Focus) stay 'low' when not enough) detected in the primary of heater
heater started tranformer.
Try an exposure on Large focus to check if
the problem is commun to both focus.
Check fuse F1 on 300-PL9 POWER SUPPLY
Bd:
There are two VERY EFFICIENT SIMULA-

TIONS to check where the circuit is open
(assuming the command from interface is
OK.
Assuming the filament is opened:
Replace the filament by a wire directly con-
nected between the pin of the HV cable (look
at SM CAL001 3/6 To identify commun pin LF
SF
assuming the primary of heater transformer is
“opened" bad contacts for example. It is also
possible to load the heater inverter by a short
circuit. (the wave form is very different, but
the heater test runs OK in this configuration
(Heater detection = YES).
See chapter 2 section 4-3-2.
RUN THE HEATER TEST

>>> go to chapter 2 section 4-3
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: - HEAT_ON This error is related to the Small Focus. Try
003 ing Failure signal Heat_OK always active to make exposure with the LF to check if
Track2 (Small goes 'low' during or inactive on there is a similar error
Focus) pre-heater phase 300-PL6 AUX
CTRL Bd.
- Strap cc5 on - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
300-PL6 and 300-PL5 Boards.
removed
(Heating mA
measure-
ment).
- Transistors
on 300-PL11
AUX PWR Bd
are open or in
short-circuit.
- Heater trans-
former is
open.

Error Messages

023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: This error is related to the Small Focus. Try
004 ing Failure signal Heat_OK to make exposure in LF to check if similar
Track2 goes 'low' during error
(Small Focus) 1st trigger
See TSG chapter 2 section 4-3
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: - This error is related to the Small Focus. Try
005 ing Failure signal Heat_OK to make exposure with the LF to check if sim-
Track2 goes 'low' during ilar error.
(Small Focus) exposure
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: This error means that the ma value in Small
006 ing Failure mA value not sig- Focus seen by the CPU is less than 50% of
Track2 nificant the reference.
(Small Focus) Check presence of strap SK1 on 300-PL8 HV
CTRL Bd (Tube current measurement).
. See SCH book 300PL8 3/10
The cause can be also a failure on BIAS.
Look at TSG chapter 2 section 8-3
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: This error is related to the Small Focus. Try
007 ing Failure signal Heat_OK to make exposure with the LF
Track2 goes 'low' after
(mall Focus) exposure See TSG chapter 2 section 4-3
023/ E11/I22 Heat- Heater track 2: - Could be - This error is related to the Small Focus. Try
008 ing Failure signal Heat_OK HEAT_ON to make exposure with the LF
Track2 stay 'high' when always active - Check cables W4 & W5 between 300-PL6
heater stopped on 300-PL6 and 300-PL5 Boards.
AUX CTRL See TSG chapter 2 section 4-3
Bd.
026/ E06 Software Grid software

001 Error error: abnormal
command
received

Init command
received

Start command
received

task status

Error Messages
027/ E71 BUCKY Grid sync: signal - If this error is still present after Bucky Con-
001 FAILURE Synchro_Grid trol Board reset (by removing and then insert-
'high' in standby ing the bucky),
status replace 200-PL3 board.
- Ckeck also yellow LED on 300-PL5 Inter-
face Bd (FPGA_OK): LED must blinking 1
sec. period. If not, replace 300-PL5 Bd.
027/ E71 BUCKY Signal Note: Check that the Jumper (needle) U32
002 FAILURE Bucky_Fail high on the 200-PL3 board (Bucky command) is
at the end of opened.
autotest or dur- 200PL3 is located at the bottom of the arm.
ing exposure See drawing on SM Rev 2 in renewal part
chapter page 5-42 (or service note 4212).
Function of this jumper: When the jumper is
closed (maintenance position) the fault
detection of the bucky is more sensitive. It
means 027/002 will be generated with a
smaller number of lost steps detected.
RESOLUTION: One step of the stepper
motor gives a travel of 30 microns (30/1000
millimeters).
=========================
The fault type from the bucky is given by the
combination of LED DS2 DS3 DS4 on
200PL3
See TSG chapter 3821 (an item of SN4212 is
about that)
On the Service Note, the led status are
expressed by “0" or “1"
“0" means that the led is LIT.
“1" means that the led is OFF
See also SM rev2 chapter 2 central listing
page 2-1
- If optional 24X30 Bucky is present on site,
install it. If no more error message, replace
18X24 Bucky.
027/ E71 BUCKY No synchro grid - Switch OFF the Senographe.

003 FAILURE signal detected - Check fuse F2 on 300-PL13 GANTRY
during autotest POWER SUPPLY Bd
- Check fuse F5 on 300-PL2 LIGHT & ROT
Bd:
. If fuse F5 l blows immediately after replace-
ment, check that these is no short-circuit
between 30V STATIF (Upper side of F5) and
ground.
- Check cable W8 between 300-PL6-J4 (AUX
PLY Bd).
See TSG chapter 2 section 3-8.

Error Messages
027/ E71 BUCKY No synchro grid - Check the connection between 200-PL3
004 FAILURE signal detected Bucky Command Board and 300-PL5 Inter-
after start com- face board (W102).
mand
027/ E71 BUCKY Sync_Grid signal - If this error is still present after Bucky reset,
005 FAILURE “low" during grid check with the Laptop from the maintenance
motion Menu (ARM_SYNC MAINT TEST ) if the
Sync_Grid signal is activated with the first
trigger (PREPA switch):
. If not activated on 200-PL3 Bucky Com-
mand bd, then replace 200-PL3,
Note:
- Could be 300-PL5 Interface Board (Input
buffer U13-5 must be “1" V (4.010 V) during
motion) or 200-PL3 Command
027/ E71 BUCKY Sync_Grid signal - Check connections between 200-PL3-J1

007 FAILURE remains “high" Bucky Command bd and 300-PL5-J9 Inter-
after stop com- face bd.
mand
- Disconnect J9-300-PL5, and check pin 10
level:
. Must be 0V to be OK (if roughly 5V, replace
200-PL3 board).
- You can also proceed as follows:

. Check signal on U13-pin 5 of 300-PL5 Bd:
When disconnecting J9 of 300-PL5 Bd, level
goes to “0"
(that means 300-PL5 Bd is OK).
. Check signal START GRID on U8-pin 9 of
200-PL3 Bd: If permanent level at “1",
replace 200-PL3 Bd.
Note:
- Could be W102 cable disconnected or 200-
PL3 Board failure.
- Could be 300-PL5 Interface Board (Input

buffer U13-5 must be 0V after stop) or 200-
PL3 Command Board
output buffer.
031/ E06 Software Generator: delay

001 Error task software
error: unknown
command
031/ E06 Software Generator: delay

002 Error task software
error: unknown
task status

Error Messages
036/ E06 Software HTPM/IPM soft-

unknown com-
mand

unwanted com-
mand

unknown task
status
037/ E09 / I20 AEC IPM: offset cur- - Bad connec- PAY ATTENTION IF THE ERROR IS INTER-
003 Failure rent value outside tions, MITTENT or SOLID (occurs at each power-
tolerance - Calibration up)
problem, COMMUN CAUSE: The current offset is out
- bad PM tube of the window 800 Hz to 2400 Hz
or Interface # ACTION: Run the PM test
Bd._ >>> click on TSG icon to see the test layout.
IF error 037/003 is intermittent:
1)
a) Notice if occurrence is more in some arm
configurations. If yes, check if the cause is
some light entrance:
Turn off the lights in the room, Run the test
PM with HVPM configure to 800 Volts &
autotest test to “NO"
Write down the displayed value.
b) Direct a strong spot to the direction of
image receptor , run the test again. if you
have much more than with the dark room the
photocell assembly is no light proof.
2)
The cause can be a “dark" current of photo
tube to important; To check that:
a) Run the test with HV to 300 V and write
down the current offset value.
The average usually found is about 1300
Hertz
b) Configure the HV to 900 V & run the test
again. If the difference is more than 30 Hertz
it means the phototube is bad. Replace the
photocell assembly.
037/ E09 / I20 AEC HTPM/IPM: - Go to Troubleshooting Guide chapter 6

005 Failure invalid HTPM Two groups of causes:
value (valid range 1) There is no HV PM
= reference - 2) The calibration is very poor. Calibration is
20%, +30%) described in SM CAL004

Error Messages
041/ E06 Software Gene thermal

001 Error protection soft-
ware: VRTX error

ware: VRTX error

ware: VRTX error

ware: VRTX error

ware: unknown
anode starter sta-
tus

ware: VRTX error
046/ E06 Software 27V protection

001 Error software: VRTX
error
062/ I23 Console Gene to control - Bad connec- - Check the following connections:
000 Communica- panel communi- tions between
tion Fail cation driver: no CPU and Con- . Cable W13 between the Console (Control
reply from console, Panel) and 300-PL9 POWER SUPPLY Bd
trol panel after 2 - Control (J5),
attempts Panel (Con- (Tx+ = J5-Pin14; Tx- = J5-Pin1; Rx+ = J5-
sole). Pin15; Rx- = J5-Pin 2)
. Cable W8 between 300-PL9 (J4) and 300-

PL6 AUX.CTRL Bd (J4):
- Run the autotest of the console.
066/ E14 CPU or Gene date/time: - 300-PL4 - Replace 300-PL4 CPU Bd.
000 INTERFACE access timeout CPU Bd fail-
Failure during dater init ure, Note:
- Failure could be CS_DATEUR signal to +
5V on CPU (Chip B31 Pin 2).

Error Messages
Failure during read ure, Note:
sequence CS_DATEUR - Failure could be CS_DATEUR signal to +
signal to + 5V 5V on CPU (Chip B31 Pin 2).
on CPU (Chip
B31 Pin 2).
Failure during write ure, Note:
on CPU (Chip
B31 Pin 2).
Failure during time write ure, Note:
on CPU (Chip
B31 Pin 2).
067/ E06 Software Generator: Zero

000 Error divide
068/ E06: Software Check the cable connection between J8

029 error 300PL5 & J4 200PL5.
068/ E06 Software Generator: float- - Perform AEC / AOP calibration procedure of
xxx Error ing point calcula- the Senographe. See Senographe Service
tion error. xxx is Manual.
VRTX task num- Flow chart is illust 1-17 page 1-34
ber . If this error is still present after calibration
procedure, please note this error code and
report to support center!!!

Error Messages
071/ E12 Check- Generator: Hope you have a data back-up !!!!!
081 sum Error Checksum error Perform Reloading Procedure of Senographe
on Battery Back- Parameters to be sure to keep the good Con-
Up RAM (BBR) figuration & Calibration parameters of the
Senographe for next time.
- Check jumper X2: see Job card IST007 2/2
of Service Manual.
. If this error is still present after Parameters
Reloading Procedure, replace the LITHIUM
Battery BT1 on 300-PL4 CPU Bd.
. If the error is still present after the LITHIUM
Battery replacement, replace 300-PL4 CPU
Board.
Note 1:
- If the Senographe parameters are altered
without redoing the Checksum Procedure
from Installation Menu, it will display this
error.
Note 2:
- LITHIUM Battery voltage is 3.6 V. If the volt-
age becomes less than 2.5 V, it will be
detected by the CPU.
071/ E08 Power Generator: time- This error is generated if the measured
082 Supply Failure out on signal DC_BUS is less than 160 V or greater than
DC_BUS_OK 400 Volts.
going 'low' or - One of the causes: incoming line imped-
'high' ance is too high mostly during exposure.
See also TSG chapter 5241
So, check if the error code occurs in the two
following configurations:
1) Make an exposure In application mode
30KV GF. (3 KW)
2) Make an exposure in application mode
22KV SF. (0.44 KW)
071/ E06 Software Generator: error

083 Error reading 'kV law
table' in 0 pt tech-
nique AOP
072/ E06 Software Exposure soft-

unknown origin of
aborted exposure

aborted by PM in
2 pts technique

Error Messages

unknown expo-
sure technique

007 Error ware error: unsta-
ble system task
detected

009 Error ware error: 0 pt or
1 pt exposure
gantry absent

unknown expo-
sure request
073/ E06 Software Gene software

001 Error error (IST,
standby): param-
eter display prob-
lem

standby):
unknown tube
type

standby): alpha =
0.0 when calcu-
lating value
P_NDac_HTPM

standby): incor-
rect thickness for
correlation calcu-
lation

standby): bias
calibration task
problem

Error Messages

standby): heater
scale calibration
task problem

standby): HV/
DAC calibration
task problem

standby): FREG/
HV calibration
task problem

standby): PM cal-
ibration task
problem

standby): PM cal-
ibration task
problem

standby): PM cal-
ibration task
problem

standby): PM cal-
ibration task
problem

standby): mA
measurement
calibration prob-
lem

001 Error error (IST, expo-
sure): unknown
exposure end

Error Messages

004 Error error (IST, expo-
sure): unknown
exposure status
075/ E06 Software Gene sofware

010 Error error (MNT):
anode starter
speed impossible

anode stater
anormal test task
status

heater: impossi-
ble track

heater: abnormal
test task status

heater: abnormal
test task status

030 Error error (MNT): bias:
abnormal test
task status

040 Error error (MNT): HV
test: abnormal
test task status

041 Error error (MNT): gate
test: abnormal
test task status

inverter test:
abnormal test
task status

Error Messages

050 Error error (MNT): mA
value: abnormal
test task status

051 Error error (MNT): mA
measurement:
abnormal test
task status

060 Error error (MNT): grid
sync: abnormal
test task status

070 Error error (MNT): PM
test: abnormal
test task status

test: abnormal
test task status

test: measure-
ment timeout

090 Error error (MNT): error
codes: display
problem

codes: display
problem

codes: display
problem

codes: display
problem

Error Messages

transfer: frame
code error

transfer: abnor-
mal transfer task
(save) status

transfer: abnor-
mal transfer task
(save) status

transfer: abnor-
mal state trans-
fer task (load)
status

transfer: abnor-
mal state trans-
fer task (load)
status

transfer:
unknown frame

transfer: end of
loading error

transfer: abnor-
mal tranfer task
(protocol) status
075/ E06 Software Gantry software

110 Error error (MNT): light
anormal test task
status

Error Messages

111 Error error (MNT): rota-
tion anormal test
task status

112 Error error (MNT): ele-
vator anormal
test task status

113 Error error (MNT): dis-
play anormal test
task status

emergency
switch anormal
test task status

compression
anormal test task
status

116 Error error (MNT): filter
anormal test task
status

117 Error error (MNT): LED
anormal test task
status
078/ E06 Software Gene init tests

002 Error software error:
timeout on sys-
tem task

defective func-
tion will
self_identify

defective func-
tion will
self_identify

Error Messages

defective func-
tion will
self_identify

error following
VRTX request
079/ E05 Failure Exposure This error means that the actual time of expo-
001 during Expo- aborted: timeout sure is more that 1.4 times the predicted time
sure in two point mode
or in AEC or AOP.
One of the cause is Ma too low in relation to
the mA reference.
079/ E05 Failure Exposure Consequence of 023/005

002 during Expo- aborted: heater
sure fault
079/ E05 Failure Exposure consequence of 017/005

003 during Expo- aborted: anode
sure starter fault
079/ E05 Failure Exposure See TSG chapter 5241: Supply defect:
004 during Expo- aborted: power Mains_OK
sure fault
079/ E05 Failure Exposure This error can be a consequence of 006/004

005 during Expo- aborted: genera- or 006/000.
sure tor fault See chapter 2 section 5-2-4-4
079/ E05 Failure Exposure - In general this error is the consequence of

007 during Expo- aborted: no syn- 027/004.
sure chro grid signal If this error message is still present after
detected Bucky Command Board reset (by removing
and reinserting the Bucky) replace 200PL3
board.
079/ E05 Failure Gantry fault Note: - If optional 24X30 Bucky is present,
008 during Expo- detected before install it to check if the pb is with both of
sure start of exposure Bucky.

Error Messages
079/ E05 Failure Exposure - This error is the most often the conse-
009 during Expo- aborted: quence of 027/002.
sure Sync_Grid signal - If 079/009 is intermittent set the jumper U2
goes “low" during on 200PL3 on maintenance position (closed).
exposure If the error occurs more with U2 closed it
means the cause is a poor mechanical
adjustment of the bucky or poor connections.
- If this error message is still present after
Bucky Command Board reset, replace Bucky
Command Board (200-PL3 board)
Board.
080/ E05 Failure Gene (IST, expo- - idem Error Code 079/002
001 during Expo- sure): heater fault
sure
002 during Expo- sure): anode
sure starter fault
003 during Expo- sure): power fail-
sure ure
004 during Expo- sure): interface
sure fault
080/ E05 Failure Gene (IST, expo- Note: - If optional 24X30 Bucky is present,
007 during Expo- sure): no gantry install it to check if the error occurs with both
sure reply to exposure buckies.
command
080/ E05 Failure Gene (IST, expo- - If this error message is still present after
008 during Expo- sure): no signal Bucky Command Board reset (by removing
sure Sync_Grid and inserting again the bucky).
if another bucky ia available install it to check
if the problem exits with two different buckies.
080/ E05 Failure Gene (IST, expo- - If this error message is still present after
009 during Expo- sure): Sync_Grid Bucky Command Board reset (by removing
sure signal goes “low" and inserting the
during exposure bucky), replace Bucky Command Board
(200-PL3 board)
082/ E06 Software Gene: 'Endur-

000 Error ance' error code


Error Messages




090/ E14 CPU or Generator:

000 INTERFACE PROM check-
failure sum error.
101/ E14 CPU or 300-PL5 Inter-

001 INTERFACE face: reset error
Failure

002 INTERFACE face: read/write
Failure error on timer
PTM3 (U28)

PTM3 (U28)

PTM4 (U29)

PTM4 (U29)

006 INTERFACE face: interrupt
Failure error on DUART1

007 INTERFACE face: PTM3 (U28)
Failure timer 1 defective



Error Messages




Failure error on PTM3
(U28) timer1

(U28) timer2

(U28) timer3

(U29) timer1

(U29) timer2

(U29) timer3

019 INTERFACE face: Gantry
failure power validation
failure

task code of
safety tube signal

Error Messages

task command
(light centering)

task command
(compression)

compression
pedal status

status code of
compression
adjustment pres-
ence

task command
(filter wheel)

task command
(filter wheel)

task command
(column up/
down)

column command
button status
code

task command
(comp. arm rota-
tion)

002 Error error: column:
unknown task
status

Error Messages

VRTX error

unknown order
transmitted to
task

002 Error error: compres-
sion: unknown
task status

sion: VRTX error

sion: unknown
order transmitted
to task
108/ E06 Software Unknown status

001 Error code of collima-
tor configuration

000 Error error: filter wheel:
VRTX error

unknown task
status

unknown task
status

unknown task
status

unknown order
transmitted to
task

Error Messages

unknown order
transmitted to
task
112/ E06 Software The task filter

013 Error received a
request for an
unknown filter

002 Error error: light center-
ing: unknown
task status

ing: VRTX error

ing: unknown
order transmitted
to task

002 Error error: rot. brake:
unknown task
status

VRTX error

unknown order
transmitted to
task
156/ I72: Column Elevator: A movement of column is requested and the

005 motion failure mechanical end detected speed is not correct (Speed to
of travel or actual slow).
speed four times 156/005 is generated if the column is stopped
less than speed by an obstacle during the downwards move-
reference ment (a chair for example).
156/ I72 Column Elevator: upper This error code happens:

006 Motion Failure mechanical end 1) if the cables from the end of travel
of travel reached switches are connected to the “wrong" plug
during a down- on 300PL1 inversion of J7 J8
wards movement. 2) There is an inversion between the + and -
of the elevator motor.

Error Messages
156/ I72 COLUM Elevator: lower See error 156/006

007 MOTION mechanical end
FAILURE of travel reached
during a upwards
movement
156/ I72 Column Column: Both - EOT (End of THEORY REMINDER:

008 Motion Failure end of travel sen- travel) switch For safety reason, when the column is not at
sors are closed failure. end of travel (either low or high) the end of
travel switch must be closed (to make sure
the wiring continuity from the switch to
300PL1 board is OK)
156/ I72 Column Column: signal

010 Motion Failure Elev_Soft_Pres
too long in 'low'
status
156/ I72 Column Column: signal

012 Motion Failure Elev_Soft_Pres
too long in 'high'
status
156/ I72 Column Column: Signals - Switch OFF the Senographe;

013 Motion Failure Elev_State_Off & - Check fuse F3 on 300-PL1 Elevator & Com-
Elev_On in “high" pression Bd:
status . If the fuse F3 l blows after replacement,
check that these no short-circuit between
30V ELEV (upper side of F3) and ground:
must be roughly 1,5K. If not, replace 300-PL1
Bd.
- Check connections of cable W113 between
300-PL1-J7 and 200-S5 switch.
156/ I72 Column Column: signal This error means that the column power
014 Motion Failure (Elev_Soft_Pres stage is active without command: (ELEV_ON
& Oper_Pres_Sw is the command
& Valid_Elev_On) from CPU via interface 300PL5)
= 1 & Elev_On =
0 See TSG chapter 2 section 3-1
156/ I72 Column Column: - Replace 300-PL5 Interface board.

015 Motion Failure Elev_Soft_Pres *
Oper_Soft _Pres
* Valid_Elev_On
= 0 & Elev_On =
1&
Elev_State_OFF
=1

Error Messages
156/ K50 Column Column: Power - Check the connection of cable W1 (between
016 Fail > shutdown: uncon- 300-PL1-J1 Elevator & Compression Bd and
Power Shut- trolled movement 300-PL5-J12 Interface Bd).
down risk (column); sig- Elev_sate-off has a test point on 300PL5
nal Elev_On=0 & called " Elev_off " . In standby, the level must
Elev_State_Off=0 be " 1" (4.010 V).
This signal is generated as " stat_e " signal
on 300PL1 4/8 A5.
“stat_e" is inverted two times and becomes
ELEV_STAT_OFF same point that Elev_off
test point.
156/ K50 Column Column: Power Elev_sate-off has a test point on 300PL5
018 Fail > shutdown: uncon- called " Elev_off ". In standby, the level must
Power Shut- trolled movement be " 1" (4.010 V).
down risk (column); This signal is generated as " stat_e " signal
Elev_State_Off = on 300PL1 4/8 A5.
0 during init “stat_e" is inverted two times and becomes
ELEV_STAT_OFF same point that Elev_off
test point.
156/ I72 Column Colum: signal - Replace 300-PL5 Interface board.

019 Motion Failure Elev_On = 1 dur-
ing init
156/ I72 Column Column: direc- - The cause is an inversion of the + and - of
020 Motion Failure tion of movement the elevator motor.
is opposite to the - Check the connections of Elevator motor
desired direction 200-M1 to 300-PL1 board (W116, J2 ; leads
1-2).
156/ K50 Column Column: Power - Check fuses F1, F2 & F3 on 300-PL1 Eleva-
023 Fail > Power Shut- tor & Compression Bd.
Shutdown down:Elev_Soft_ . If fuses are OK, replace 300-PL1 Bd;
Pres * . If this error is still present after 300-PL1
Oper_Soft_Pres * replacement, replace 300-PL5 Interface
Valid_Elev_On = board.
0 & Elev_On =1 &
Elev_State_Off =
0
156/ I72 Column Column: Safety: - 200-S5

026 Motion Failure Elevator motor Security
cable cut Switch failure,
- Bad connec-
tions between
200-S7 Switch
and 300-PL1
Bd._

Error Messages
156/ I72 Column Column: CFEM - Disconnect J2 of 300-PL1 Elevator & Com-
027 Motion Failure frequency out of pression Board:
range . Measure 200-M1 motor resistor value
(about 2 Ohm). If a short-circuit is detected,
replace 200-M1 Elevator motor;
. If 200-M1 motor is OK, replace the 300-PL1
board.
Board.
156/ I72 Column Column: CFEM - Disconnect J2 of 300-PL1 Elevator & Com-
028 Motion Failure frequency out of pression Board:
range in stand-by . Measure 200-M1 motor resistor value
status (About 2 ohms). If a short-circuit is detected,
replace 200-M1 Elevator motor.
. If 200-M1 motor is OK, replace 300-PL1
Board.
Board.
156/ I72 Column Column: Nil time

030 Motion Failure for CFEM calcu-
lation during init
156/ I72 Column Column: Nil time

031 Motion Failure for CFEM calcu-
lation
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: -(TSG ch 322) . Go to compression test F10/

005 sion Failure abnormal force F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/COMP/FORCE/ and
frequency look at freq force signal: the value must be
between 32 & 154 KHZ .
- When the Frequency from the hall effect
captor on 200PL7 is not present or not trans-
mitted (connection
pb for example) the frequency is 0 HZ.
- The frequency of this signal can be check
also with a scope on 300-PL5 Board at test
point C_FORCE:
Connect the scope between C_FORCE TP &
0V TP.
On the scope select auto mode 5 micro sec/
div 2/div
This signal must be always present in appli-
cation mode or in the sub-comp test.
>>> go to chapter 2 section 3-2-2)
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: Comp_ON is a signal from plug J12 300PL5
006 sion Failure signal Comp_On to XJ1 300PL1 SCH300PL1 1/8 GE
'high' during init

Error Messages
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: THEORY REMINDER: There are two micro
008 sion Failure Security_Comp contacts in each foot switch:
test fails Compression footswitch: one micro switch for
comp command.
another one for detection of command pres-
ence.
To get the movement (comp or decomp) both
of micro contacts must be closed at the same
time. However
there is a time out of 10 sec (means that the
“second" contact can occur between 0 and
10sec whithout
generating an error code.
CAUSES: 1) This Error Message is displayed
if the COMP/DECOMP Footswitch is
pressed(or jammed) during the Senographe
autotest (after Power-Up).
ACTION: Disconnect the one or two foot-
switches from XJ10 A & B from 300PL1 and
try another power up
2) The micro switch of “presence" is stuck
and permanently closed.
Pin five (5) of XJ10 is not used. The “pres-
ence" contact is between pin 3 & pin 2.
The “compression" contact is between pin 3
& pin 1.
The “decompression" contact is between pin
3 & 4. --------------
|123|
XJ1O of the cable attached to the foot switch:
|456|
See SCH 300PL1 page 1/8 at B4 --------------
>>> goes to chapter 2 section 3-2.
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: - Check if compression is present on the pad-

009 sion Failure signal Comp_On dle:
& . If compression is present, then check W1
Comp_State_Off cable connections (between 300-PL5-J12
both 'low' and 300-PL1-J1).
>>> go chapter 2 section 3-2.

Error Messages
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: - Fuses. - Check fuse F1 on 300-PL13 GANTRY

010 sion Failure signal Comp_On - Signal POWER SUPPLY Bd:
& COMP_ON . If fuse F1 is blown, disconnect cable W14
Comp_State_Off not active on from 300-PL13-J1. Check if these is a short-
both 'high' 300-PL1. cut between F1 fuse output and ground.
- 300-PL1 fail- - Check fuse F2 on 300-PL1 Elevator & Com-
ure. pression Bd:
. If fuse F2 blows gain after replacement,
remove it and proceed as follows:
. Check resistance between 30V Comp (left
side of F2 fuse holder) and ground. It must be
roughly 70K. If not, replace 300-PL1 Bd.
. Disconnect 200-M2 COMP Motor from 300-
PL1Bd (J6): the resistance of 200-M2 motor
must be roughly 2,5 Ohms. If not, replace
200-M2 Motor.
PLY Bd).
- Check cable W1 between 300-PL5-J12 and
300-PL1-J1:
. If bad, replace cable W1.
. If cable is OK, replace 300-PL1 Bd.
Board.
157/ E70 Compres- Compression: R/ >>> go chapter 2 section 3-2.

011 sion Failure W error during init
in the command
register of com-
pression
157/ E70 Compres- Compression:

012 sion Failure Measured force >
30 daN
157/ E71 Compres- Compression - bad recep- >>> go chapter 2 section 3-2-1.
014 sion Adjust- adjustment: sig- tion of com- Look at the line adjustment presence in test
ment Failure nal 'Pres_Adjust' pression knob screen <00416>.
too long in 'Low' signal. Rotating the Compression knob, check that
status signals INC_KNOB1 and INC_KNOB2 are
correctly transmitted and not short-circuited:
157/ E71 Compres- Compression >>> go chapter 2 section 3-2-1.

015 sion Adjust- adjustment: sig- Probably 300-PL5 Interface Board is the
ment Failure nal 'Pres_Adjust' cause.
too long in 'High'
status

Error Messages
157/ I70 Compres- Hardware Fail- >>> go chapter 2 section 3-2-4

024 sion Failure ure: thickness Note: Adjustment of thickness potentiometer
computation out is DR20.
of range Calibration of breast thickness is CAL009.
157/ I70 Compres- Hardware Fail- - Position the paddle half way and check the
025 sion Failure ure: thickness signal at TP3 200-PL9 ARM 2 DISTRIBU-
potentiometer fre- TION Board is approx. 5V _ 1V. If the voltage
quency out of is out perform DR020 in SM and then
range CAL009.
>>> go chapter 2 section 3-2-4.
The frequency should be about 70 kHz. If out
of range, replace 200-PL9.
157/ I70 Compres- Unstability - PTM failure - Position the paddle half way and check the
026 sion Failure between two on 300-PL5 signal at TP3 200-PL9 ARM 2 DISTRIBU-
computations of - Erratic move- TION Board is approx. 5V _ 1V. If the voltage
thickness (Too ment on pad- is out perform DR020 in SM and then
high differences dle. CAL009.
between both Check the voltage is stable when touching
measures) externally the potentiometer.
Check the frequency display is stable in the
compression sub-test thickness <00416>.
. If the frequency is not stable when voltage
at TP3 of 200 PL9 is stable, replace 200-PL9
ARM 2 DISTRIBUTION Bd.
If the frequency is stable, replace 300PL5

(PTM failure).
157/ I70 Compres- Paddle motion - Switch OFF the Senographe.

027 sion Failure detected without
thickness modi- - Replace 300-PL5 Interface Board.
cation
157/ I70 Compres- Thickness modifi- - Check the connection of the thickness
028 sion Failure cation without potentiometer to J5 plug on 200PL9 (see
paddle motion SCH 2/3 C2)

Error Messages
158/ E51 Collima- Collimator: Opto - Remove and replace the collimator blade to
017 tor Failure electronic sen- reset.
sors failure - Check yellow LED on 300-PL5 Interface Bd
(FPGA_OK). It must blinking one second
period. If not, replace
300-PL5 Bd.
Check that DS2 on 200PL1 is lit (200PL1 is
the board we se next to the tube when the
cabinet is at our right)
Note: The only way to reset this error is to

turn the system off and on after correcting the
cause of the
error. If more then two of these signal are
active at power up the error will be logged
and the system
will never permit exposure.
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: step - 200-PL9 Cycle OFF/ON the senographe.
006 Positioning number error ARM 2 DIS-
Failure between two ref- TRIBUTION - Check connections of 200-M3 Motor
erences (800T) Bd. (W215) to 200-PL9-J3,
- Check connection of cable W103 to 200-
PL9-J1
- Check gear coupling between Motor and
Filter Wheel.
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: step - Cycle OFF/ON the senographe.
007 Positioning number error - Check connections of 200-M3 Motor
Failure between two ref- (W215) to 200-PL9-J3,
erences (800T - Check connection of cable W103 to 200-
only) PL9-J1:
. Check gear coupling between Motor and Fil-
ter Wheel.
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: step - Check connections of 200-M3 Motor
008 Positioning number error (W215) to 200-PL9-J3,
Failure between two ref- - Check connection of cable W103 to 200-
erences PL9-J1:
Check gear coupling between Motor and Fil-
ter Wheel.
>>> go to TSG33)
- If the problem remains, replace 300-PL5
Interface Bd.

Error Messages
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: step - Check connections of 200-M3 Motor
009 Positioning number error (W215) to 200-PL9-J3,
Failure between two ref- - Check connection of cable W103 to 200-
erences PL9-J1:
Check gear coupling between Motor and Fil-
ter Wheel.
>>> go to TSG 33
- If the problem remains, replace 300-PL5
Interface Bd.
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: step Very often, this error is intermittent.
010 Positioning number error The most common cause is that the move-
Failure between two ref- ment is mechanically too resistant:
erences 1) The filter wheel does not turn in parallel to
the plate where the wheel and motor are
secured and there is
a friction at some locations.
2) The teeth of the motor gear are to tighten
with the wheel teeth.
The FILTER MAINT TEST displays the lost
steps on the line " Delta step "
Tolerance is + or - 2 lost steps without gener-
ating error code.
During the test if the system displays + 1 or-
1 in front of Delta step the adjustment is
acceptable.
In other words, the system detects some lost
steps even with an optimized mechanical
adjustment.
>>> See DR012 to access to the filter assem-
bly.
<<< go chapter 2 section 3-3.
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: no - Check yellow LED (FPGA_OK) on 300-PL5
011 Positioning reference cross- Interface Bd. It must blinking 1 s period. If not
Failure ing during rota- see TSG chapter 2 section 2-1
tion - Check fuse F5 on 300-PL2 LIGHT & ROT
Bd:
If fuse F5 is still blown after replacement,
check that these is no shortcut between 30V
STATIF
(Upper side of F5) and ground.
- Check the fuse F2 on 300-PL13 GANTRY
POWER SUPPLY Bd.
PLY Bd).
- Check connections of 200-B1 Filter Cell
(W214) to 200-PL9-J2, and of cable W103 to
200-PL9-J1

Error Messages
162/ I81/E64 Filter Filter wheel: in Very often, this error is intermittent.
012 Positioning standby, wheel The most common cause is that the move-
Failure moved from sta- ment is mechanically too resistant:
ble position 1) The filter wheel does not turn in parallel to
the plate where the wheel and motor are
secured and there is
a friction at some locations.
2) The teeth of the motor gear are to tighten
with the wheel teeth.
The FILTER MAINT TEST displays the lost
steps on the line " Delta step "
Tolerance is + or - 2 lost steps without gener-
ating error code.
During the test if the system displays + 1 or-
1 in front of Delta step the adjustment is
acceptable.
In other words, the system detects some lost
steps even with an optimized mechanical
adjustment.
>>> See DR012 to access to the filter assem-
bly.
164/ I55 Light Cen- Light centering - Bad connec- Check if the filament of the lamp is not
001 tering Device device: signal tions. opened. Look at SM DR014 for info about
Fail Light_Fail is in - Bad lamp. access to the lamp,
wrong state - 300-PL2 Bd or disconnect the two wires from J4 300PL2
failure. and check continuity (lamp + cable) between
the two terminals of cable W105.
Check the fuse F6 on 300-PL2 LIGHT &
ROT. Bd.
>>> go chapter 2 section 3-5 if necessary.
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake: - Software

005 Brake Failure signal problem.
Rot_Soft_Pres
too long in 'low'
status
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake:

006 Brake Failure signal
Rot_Soft_Pres
too long in 'high'
status

Error Messages
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake: - Check fuse F1 on 300-PL2 Light & Rot Bd.
007 Brake Failure signal Rot_On If fuse F1 is still blown after replacement,
'high', signal check resistance between 30V ROT (upper
Rot_State_Off side of F1) and
Inactive 'low' ground: should be roughly 8 K: if not replace
300-PL2 Bd.
. Check also resistance of brake coil: discon-
nect the two wires from XJ2 300PL2.
Measured value must be approxi. 6 Ohms.
If not, replace the brake assembly.
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake: ROT_SATE_OFF is the same point than
008 Brake Failure (Rot_Soft_Pres & ROTOFF test point.
Oper_Pres_Sw & When Arm rotation is not commanded, ROT-
Valid_Rot_On) = OFF TP must be at “1" (4.010V)
1 & Rot_On = 0 & Approximate path of ROTOFF from origin is:
Rot_State_Off = On 300PL2 3/4 R_OFF signal becomes
1 ROT_STAT_OFF to 300PL5 = ROTOFF
. If any of these switches signals don't move,
check connections and 200-PL1 ARM 1 DIS-
TRIBUTION Board.
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake: Origin of this signal is on 300PL5 and sent to
009 Brake Failure signal Rot_On 300PL2 1/4 3E.
'high' without - Check signal on chip U2-1 of 300-PL2 Light
legal command & Rot Bd:
. If signal is +5V, replace 300-PL2 Bd.

- If still problem after 300-PL2 Bd replace-
ment, replace 300-PL5 Interface Board.
171/ K52 Rotat. Power shutdown: - Check 30 V Fuses F1, F2, F3 on 300-PL2
010 Fail > Power uncontrolled LIGHT & ROT Bd
Shutdown movement risk - Check connection of W2 (between 300-PL2
(arm brake); and 300-PL5 Interface Bd):
Rot_State_Off & . If the connection is OK, replace 300-PL2.
Rot_On are 'low' . If this error is still present after 300-PL2
board.
171/ K52 Rotat. Power shutdown: - Switch OFF the Senographe,

012 Fail > Power uncontrolled - Replace 300-PL2 LIGHT & ROT Bd.
Shutdown movement risk . If this error is still present after 200-PL2
(arm brake); replacement, replace 300-PL5 Interface
Rot_State_Off Board.
'low' during init
171/ I73 Rotation Arm rot. brake: - Replace 300-PL5 Interface board.
013 Brake Failure signal Rot_On
'high' during init

Error Messages
171/ K52 Rotat. Power shutdown: - Cycle OFF/ON the senographe:

014 Fail > Power uncontrolled - Check signal on chip U2-1 of 300-PL2 Light
Shutdown movement risk & Rot Bd:
(arm brake); . If signal is +5V, replace 300-PL2 Bd.
Rot_Soft_Pres & - If still problem after 300-PL2 Bd replace-
Oper_Pres_Sw & ment, replace 300-PL5 Interface Board.
Valid_Rot_On =1
& Rot_On = 0 &
Rot_State_Off =
0
171/ I73 Rotation Brake tempera- - Wait until Temperature message disap-
015 Brake Failure ture too high pears.
Note: Could be: - The brake switches were

pressed too many times or too long (10 mn).
171/ I73 Rotation Hard Failure, - Position the column vertically:

016 Brake Failure angle potentiom- - Check signal on TP “Angle" of 200-PL9
eter frequency ARM 2 DISTRIBUTION Board: should be
out of range about 5V: (GND is TP1)
. If not, set the cursor at 5V.
. If signal is OK, check signal on TP “Angle"
of 300-PL5 Interface Board:
. The frequency should be about 70 kHz. If
out of range, replace 200-PL9.
- If this error is still present after 200-PL9
Board.
171/ I73 Rotation Unstability - Look at SCH 200PL9 2/3

017 Brake Failure between two Check that the cursor of pot (TP2) is at + 5V
computations of when arm is vertical.
angle (Too high Perform CAL008 (Column Angulation mea-
differences surement).
between both - If this error is still present after CAL008,
measures) check on TP “Angle " of 300-PL5 Interface
Board that the frequency is stable.
. If not, replace 200-PL9 ARM 2 DISTRIBU-
TION Bd.
. If yes, replace 300-PL5 (PTM failure).
172/ I69 Magnifica- Hardware failure: - Replace 200-PL6 Magnification Board,

003 tion Failure Magnification - If this error is still present after 200-PL6
sensor: unknown replacement, replace 300-PL5 Interface
magnification Board.
code

Error Messages
172/ I75 Button Hardware failure: Note: This signal is common to Elevator
009 Security Fail- Button interlock: function & arm rotation.
ure signal >>> go to TSG and look at " operator pres-
Oper_Pres_Sw ence" signal ( In the Arm Rotation test there
too long in 'high' is the same signal)
status Check signal Oper_Pres_Sw on 200-PL1
ARM 1 Board, J11 and J12:
. If high (5V) (without pressing any button),
replace the corresponding handle. (See
renewal part chapter)
. If low, then check on U21 Pin13 of 300-PL5
Interface Board:
. If high, replace 200-PL1.
. If low, replace 300-PL5.
172/ I75 Button Hardware failure: - Check signal Oper_Pres_Sw on 200-PL1

010 Security Fail- Button interlock: ARM 1 Board, J11 and J12:
ure signal . If low (0V) (pressing any handle button),
Oper_Pres_Sw replace the corresponding handle.
too long in 'low' . If high, (pressing any handle button), then
status check on U21 Pin13 of 300-PL5 Interface
Board:
. If high, replace 300-PL5.
172/ E07 Switch Hardware failure: At every power-up, the system tests the cor-
040 Off Emergency stop rect operation of K1 K2 relays on 300PL5 to
failure make sure of managing correctly K failures if
this type of failure occurs later.
If the test is not OK, the system displays 172/
040 but also many other errors as a conse-
quence.
Check the power supplies on 300PL5 board
IF 172/040 with power supplies correct,
REPLACE 300PL5.
172/ E07 Switch Hardware failure: - K1, K2 Relay - Switch OFF the Senographe,
041 Off Switch off failure test failure on - Replace 300-PL5 Interface Board.
300-PL5 Inter- Note:
face Board._ - K1, K2 Relay test failure on 300-PL5 Inter-
face Board.

Error Messages
172/ I77 Comp Hardware failure: THEORY REMINDER: There are two micro
055 Pedal Secu- Compression: switches in each footswitch:
rity Failure one pedal COMPRESSION FOOTSWITCH: one
pressed and sig- microswitch for comp command and another
nal one for detection of command presence.
Foot_Sw_Pres DECOMPRESSION FOOTSWITCH: one
'low' micro switch fpr decomp switch and another
one for decomp presence
time. However there is a time out of 10 sec
(means that the “second" contact can occur
between 0 and 10sec without generating an
error code.
CAUSES OF 172/055: 1) If the compression
contact is permanently closed (stuck or
jammed).
2) When pressing the compression foot-
switch the “presence" switch do not close.
Pin five (5) of XJ10 is not used. The “pres-
ence" contact is between pin 3 & pin 2.
The “compression" contact is between pin 3
& pin 1.
The “decompression" contact is between pin
3 & 4. XJ1O of the cable attached to the foot-
switch: See SCH 300PL1 page 1/8 at B4 -----
---------
|123|
|456|
--------------
. If low, replace Comp/Decomp Footswitch.
. If high for both Footswitches, replace 300-
PL5.

Error Messages
172/ I77 Comp Hardware failure: THEORY REMINDER: There are two micro
056 Pedal Secu- Compression: no switches in each footswitch:
rity Failure pedal pressed COMPRESSION FOOTSWITCH: one
and signal microswicth for comp command and another
Foot_Sw_Pres one for detection of command presence.
'high' DECOMPRESSION FOOTSWITCH: one
micro switch fpr decomp switch and another
one for decomp presence
time. However
there is a time out of 10 sec (means that the
“second" contact can occur between 0 and
10sec without generating an error code.
See 157/055 for wiring of footswitch cable on
XJ10 plug.
- Check signal Foot_Sw_Pres on U21 Pin 5
of 300-PL5 Interface board without pressing
Comp/Decomp Footswitch:
. If high, replace Comp/Decomp Footswitch.
172/ I74 Fan failure Hardware failure: - Check connection of cable W203 with con-
057 Fan Failure nector J2 of 200-PL1 ARM 1DISTRIBUTION
Board.
PLY Bd).
To use SENSO MAINT TEST do as follow-
ing.
With laptop connected to the senographe
and mammocom software running, select:
F10/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/2>1/SENSO.
- If the fan runs, check Pin 2 of J2 of 200-
PL1; Should be 100 Hz:
. If not, replace the Wired Tube Cooling FAN.
. If yes, check U33 Pin 1 of 300-PL5 Interface
Board. Should be about 6 Hz;
. If no, replace 200-PL1 Bd.
. If yes, replace 300-PL5 Interface bd.
E01 E01 Genera- Switch off the seno and switch on.
tor Failure If error occurs again, troubleshoot.
E02 E02 Focus Switch off and switch on.

Bias Failure If error occurs again trouble shoot
E03 E03 Rotor Switch off and switch on again.

Failure If error occurs again troubleshoot.
E05 E05 Failure Switch off and switch on.

during Expo- If error occurs again troubleshoot
sure

Error Messages
E06 E06 Software Switch off and switch on.

Error
E07 E07 Switch

Off
E08 E08 Power Switch off and switch on.

Supply Failure Can be associated to 071/081
E09 E09 AEC Fail- Switch off switch on.

ure Look at 037/OO3 and 037/005
E10 E10 Heating Switch off and switch on.

Failure Track
1
E11 E11 Heating Switch off switch off.

Failure Track2
E12 E12 CHECK-

SUM ERROR
E14 E14 CPU or E14 can be associated to many 6 digit error

INTERFACE codes.
Failure
E51 E51 Collima-

tor Failure
E64 E64 Filter Switch off and switch on.

Positioning
Failure
E70 E70 Compres- Switch off and switch on.

sion Failure
E71 E71 BUCKY REMINDER: Bucky grid of 700T/800T is

FAILURE driven by a stepper motor.
Ask the customer if the error occur with the
both buckies.
E72 E72 COL- Switch off and switch on.

UMN FAIL-
URE
I07 I07 The filter selected by the operator is not

SELECTED allowed.
FILTER NOT Information only: the seno automatically
ALLOWED xx selects the correct filter (in function of KV)

Error Messages
I12 I12 MAXIMUM I12 is a message related to AEC only (not

mAs = xxx AOP).
If we make an exposure at this time, the sys-
tem can not deliver more than this displayed
value.
This value is function of KV, of course. At the
very beginning of exposure, the system com-
putes the mAs value needed to reach the
desired optical density for this exposure.
.If this predicted value is greater than the one
displayed in the message I12, the system
decides to abort the exposure.
I20 I20 AEC FAIL- Switch off and switch on.

URE
I21 I21 HEATING REMINDER: There is no rhodium track with a

FAILURE 700T or 800T tube.
TRACK 1 (LF) TRACK 1 is large Focus.
TRACK 2 is small Focus
It is possible to use the small focus.
I22 I22 HEATING REMINDER: There is no Rhodium track with

FAILURE a 700T/800T.
TRACK 2 (SF) Track 1 is Large focus.
Track 2 is small focus.
It is possible to use the large focus.
I23 I23 Console

Communica-
tion Fail
I24 I24 Line power CAUTION: On a DMR this error occurs if the
interruption system is switched on too soon after turning it
off.
This action does not generate an I24 with the
700T/800T.
I27 I27 CPU BAT- When this message is on the console, do not
TERY ERROR switch off the seno to keep the CPU board
supplied by the power supplies (I27 means
that the lithium battery is dead or the jumper
X2 is not at the correct position). See SM
IST007 2/2 for jumper location.
I28 I28 MAX REMINDER: AEC/AOP of 700T/800T is very

WAIT FOR similar to DMR V1 or V2.
SAME EXPO- Wait the required time to repeat exposure. If
SURE min an exposure is attempted before this time, an
abort may occur (time is not accurate: there
is a safety margin).
IGNORE THE MESSAGE if a different, less
dense breast is to be imaged next.

Error Messages
I29 I29 EXCES- Reminder: AEC/AOP is very similar to the

SIVE mAs DMR.
FOR THIS I29 is always the result of a S03 message
MODE (aborted by AEC) and is a message dis-
played in AOP selection only.
That means S03 & I29 are displayed alterna-
tively on the console.
The amount of mAs necessary to repeat the
same exposure is too important in the mode
selected by the user. Correction is: “switch to
a different mode".
What is a mode: contrast, standard dose or
AEC ?
For the same breast, in AOP, the mode using
the most mAs is contrast. Dose mode uses
the least & standard mode uses an intermedi-
ate value.
Therefore if the customer got an aborted
exposure in dose mode, the only way to get a
successful exposure is to try using AEC with
31 or 32 V. IF mAs is 999, check CAL007.
ANOTHER CAUSE:
When I29 appears at each exposure for very
small absorption (for example 30KV 1cm
plexi) the cause is no IPM feedback from the
phototube (bad phototube, HV PM is not
actually across the phototube even if the volt-
age is OK on 200PL5 board.
I55 I55 Light Cen- The bulb can be out of order.

tering Device On 700T/800 the customer can change the
Failure lamp himself.
Procedure is given is section 5 page 3-27 of
OM 2135575 Rev1 and in DR14 SM
I69 I69 Magnifica- Remove mag stand and reinstall it.

tion Failure
I70 I70 Compres-

sion Failure
I71 I71 COM-

PRESSION
ADJUST-
MENT FAIL-
URE
I72 I72 Column Switch off and switch on.

Motion Failure
I73 I73 Rotation Switch off and switch on.

Brake Failure

Error Messages
I74 I74 FAN FAIL- >>> This message does not inhibit expo-
URE sures.
I75 I75 Button In the push buttons there are two contacts.
Security Fail- One of them is called “presence operator
ure
I77 I77 Comp Switch off and on.

Pedal Secu-
rity Failure
I98 I98 ROTA- The rotation brake has been activated for too
TION BRAKE long. Wait for cooling.
OVER-HEAT
I99 I99 AUTO- This is a selection in the medical menu to

DECOM- select the automatic decompression after the
PRESSION IS exposure.
OFF
Path is: setup/medical/decomp/
Configure End of exposure decomp to “NO"
to avoid the display of I99 message.
S01 S01 The customer may have released the graphy

ABORTED switch before the “normal" termination of
EXPOSURE exposure.
During the first days of seno use by custom-
ers, some of them release the graphy button
after the pre-exposure.
Most of the time when it is not an operator
error the cause is a bad contact of the push-
button on 100PL1 on the console. In this
case the error is intermittent.
REMINDER: the 700T/800T console is the
same as the DMR console.
Do not forget that it is possible to connect on
the console the same hand switch used with
AMX 4.
It is a good means to determine if S01 is due
to a bad contact of the console button.
Kit part number 2144969 includes two push-
buttons.
(go to chapter 2 section 4-1-1-1)
S02 S02 EXPO- Press reset and try another exposure.

SURE Run the HV test at 22KV and then 35 KV
ABORTED BY A cause of this message is mA are too high.
HV ARCING Perform CAL003 from SM.
Check the mA with an external meter.
Note: See Troubleshooting go chapter 2 sec-
tion 5-2-1 for explanation about this mes-
sage.

Error Messages
S03 S03 EXPO- Reminder: AEC/AOP are very similar to the

SURE DMR. Consequently the causes are similar.
ABORTED BY 1) IN AEC MODE: At the very beginning of
AEC exposure , in function of the dose read by the
photocell, the CPU calculates the mAs value
needed to get the OD target. If the predicted
value is greater than the available mAs (heat
capacity limit) the CPU stops the X-ray com-
mand.
2) IN AOP MODE: The system makes a pre-
exposure (approx. 15 ms) with KV track filter
in function of mechanical thickness data of
compression. In function of the dose read by
the photocell the CPU chooses a new config-
uration as needed. If the predicted mAs value
in the new configuration is greater than the
available mAs (heat capacity limitation), the
CPU stops the X-ray command.
+++ Note: This error occurs more with thick
and dense breasts and much more if CAL007
(SM) is not correct
If this error is solid (not intermittent) for small
thickness, and there is not an associated six
digits error code, then the cause is probably
the absence of HV across the Photo tube or
no IPM return to the board 200PL5.
The system detects if the HV is not present
on 200PL5 board, but does detect a disconti-
nuity between the board and the phototube.
The system detects if the center conductor is
shortcut to the ground (error 037/003) but
does not detect a discontinuity in the wiring
or a bad phototube (not enough current).
Check the connections of HV and IPM
cables.
S05 S05 WRONG

SELECTION
HV/TRACK
COUPL
S06 S06 KV TOO KV are too low to use AEC

LOW Raise KV value.
S08 S08 This message appears only in manual mode

REQUIRED (choice of KV and mAs).
POWER IS Decrease KV or mAs values.
TOO HIGH

Error Messages
S09 S09 NO COM- This message appears in AOP mode only.

PRESSION Breat compression is mandatory in AOP.
DETECTED S09 occurs if compression force is less than
3 deca newtons.
S10 S10 GENER- Generator requires xxx seconds to cool.

ATOR COOL- Wait for cooling time or lower the mAs in
ING manual mode.
If this message stays for a long time (several
minutes) with a selection of low mAs value,
then replace the CPU board 300PL4.
S11 S11 TUBE X- ray tube requires xxx seconds to cool.

COOLING Wait for cooling time or lower mAs in manual
mode.
If this message stays for a long time (several
minutes) with a selection of low mAs value,
replace the CPU board 300PL4.
S12 S12 OPTI- This message is information related to the

CAL TARGET last exposure.
NOT It means that the Optical density target
REACHED (OD_ref defined in CAL13 or CAL14) has not
been reached.
The maximum drop must be programmed in
the medical menu for each film/screen combi-
nation.
Path is: Setup/medical/AOP
The layout menu is: MAX DROP IN O.D FOR
xxxxxx: x.xx
+ - FSC
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
xxxxxx is the FSC name, x.xx is the selected
drop value.
Select the maximum desired drop by using
F1 (+) or - keys.
COMMENT: In practice the optimum value of
maximum drop is function of the optical den-
sity target.
If the target is 1.6 it makes sense to set a
drop value up to 0.4 because the film will be
readable at 1.6 - 0.4 = 1.2.
If the target is 1.2 0.4 for drop will may 0.8
and the film may be no “readable".
COMMENT: This feature limits the proportion
of aborted exposure by S03 but CAUTION:
If the customer gets S12 very often it can be
the result of poor calibration of CAL007

Error Messages
S13 S13 BACK UP Available mAs in less than 50 mAs.

MAS < 50 Wait for cooling time.
EXP INHIB-
ITED
S14 S14 MAXI- maximum mAs set at installation are

MUM MAS exceeded.
EXCEEDED This message appears only if a value below
600 mAs is set in the install menu.
Check the programmed value.
Path is:
S15 S15 ARM This message is the consequence of two

NOT configurations:
PRESENT 1) PRS_A (presence arm) in the install menu
has been voluntarily selected to yes (for trou-
bleshooting purpose). Path of this selection:
Setup/ install / config / Pres_A .
2) PRS_ A is set to “NO" because " no " is the
default value when data of cpu is lost.
Of course in this case, there is a checksum
error, but make sure no one made a check-
sum and consequently “validated" all default
values of the system.
S16 S16 SELECT REMINDER: AEC of 700T/800T is very close

F/S IS to the DMR V1 or V2
UNCAL- Mainly this message has two causes:
BRATED 1) One or several of the uncalibrated stations
(SFC) are not disabled in the Install menu.
See illus 1-11 in the SM.
2) CPU generator data has been lost.
S25 S25 TUBE The temperature of the tube housing is

HOUSING greater than 65 degrees celsius.
OVER TEM- This information is given by a contact of the
PERATURE Presostat screwed on the tube housing.
This contact must be closed when the tube is
“cold". Over 65 degrees celsius, this contact
must be opened.
Of course, the cause of S25 can be due to
opened wiring.
With laptop connected to the senographe
and mammocom software running, select:
F10/MAINT/MAINT/ARM2/1>2/SENSO.
ACTION: Disconnect the cable connected to
XJ3 of 200PL1 board, then temporally make
a jumper between
the two pins of the plug XJ3 on the board.
Note: The test read the signal in real time (it
is not necessary to reset the test when trou-
bleshooting).

Error Messages
S26 S26 EXPO-

SURE TOO
LONG
S30 S30 COLLIM./ Basically the reason of this message is to

RECEIVER avoid the use of a 24 X 30 collimator when
INCOMPATI- the 18 X 24 bucky or cassette holder is in
BLE place. See SCH book 200PL10 at 4H.
CAUTION: Normally this message is the
result of an application mistake, assuming
that the jumper J1 is set up correctly inside
the Bucky or cassette holder.
To use the GRID MAINTENANCE TEST do
the following:
With the laptop connected to the senographe
and mammocom software running, select
F10/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/GRID.
>>> Click on TSG icon to go to the grid test.
Look at the status of the line “Format 24 X
30".
S31 S31 INTER- Normally customers will never see this mes-
LOCK OFF sage.
EXPLANATION OF THIS MESSAGE:
If a K failure shuts off the seno and if the fail-
ure is still present, it is not possible to power
the system without removing temporally the
inhibition:
TOGGLE THE SWITCH B1 on the CPU
board in order to insure the continuity of the
emergency loop (see K1 K2 relais SCH
300PL5 page 4/10).
Message S31 stays until the seno is switched
off, but will not appear when the seno is pow-
ered again.

Error Messages
S51 S51 UNEX- This message means that there is no cas-

POSED CAS- sette in the bucky, or the previous cassette
SETTE has been exposed and has not been
MISSING replaced by one with a unexposed film.
CAUTION: Do not extract the cassette out of
the bucky by pushing with the “new" cassette.
In this case the switch of cassette presence
will not change from presence YES to pres-
ence NO.
ANOTHER CAUSE: The switch of cassette
presence does not work. Check it with the
GRID TEST
Path: F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/
Look at the line “presence cassette"
This feature can be disabled by the cus-
tomer. See illus 1-7 (MEDICAL menu) in the
SM.
Removing this “safety" is very interesting for
FEs in some situations for troubleshooting.
S51 message is associated with the lit red
LED on the arm just above the bucky plug.
This LED is tested by the LED MAINTE-
NANCE TEST.
path: F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/1>2/LED
ACTION: Press F3 (ON) the led must go on.
Press F4 (OFF) the led must go off.
Note: It is necessary to stop the test (F4) to
be able to exit the test.
S52 S52 BUCKY This message is displayed approximately

INITIALIZA- during 20 seconds after power up, or after
TION the introduction of the bucky (in the case of
change with the other size: 24 X 30 for exam-
ple).

Error Messages
This page is blank.

Signal Name List
CHAPTER 4 SIGNAL NAME LIST
1 PRESENTATION
• The list given below provides you with all hardware signal that can be found on a Senographe 700T/
800T Acquisition System.
They are presented in alphanumerical order.
2 SIGNAL NAME LIST
SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL FROM CABLE (W) SIGNAL TO
+12V 300PL9 J5-21 13 100PL2 J3-21
+12V_COUPE 300PL6 J5-19 10 300PL12 J1-19
+12V_COUPE 300PL6 J5-20 10 300PL12 J1-20
+12V_COUPE 300PL6 J5-21 10 300PL12 J1-21
+12V_COUPE 300PL6 J5-22 10 300PL12 J1-22
+15V 300PL17 J1-10 7 300PL6 J9-10
+15V 300PL6 J6-10 9 300PL11 J1-10
+15V 300PL6 J6-27 9 300PL11 J1-27
+15V 300PL6 J6-28 9 300PL11 J1-28
+15V 300PL6 J6-9 9 300PL11 J1-9
+15V 300PL6J8-3 5 300PL8 J9-3
+15V 300PL6J8-9 5 300PL5 J11-3
+15V/+15VF 300PL5 J10-10 2 300PL2 J1-10
+15V/+15VF 300PL5 J12-17 1 300PL1 J1-17
+15V/+15VF 300PL5 J12-18 1 300PL1 J1-18
+15VBF 300PL7 SK2-1 31 300PL17 J4-11
+15VF 300PL5 J6-19 103 200PL9 J1-19
+15VF 300PL5 J6-20 103 200PL9 J1-20
+15VF 300PL5 J7-11 104 200PL1 J1-11
+15VF 300PL5 J7-12 104 200PL1 J1-12
+15VF 300PL5 J8-10 101 200PL5 J4-10
+15VF 300PL5 J9-11 102 200PL3-J1-11
+15VF 300PL5 J9-14 102 200PL3-J1-14
Signal.fm Page no. 143 Chapter 4

Signal Name List
+15VS 300PL17 J1-7 7 300PL6 J9-7
+15VS 300PL6 J4-21 8 300PL9 J4-21
+15VS 300PL6 J4-22 8 300PL9 J4-22
+15VS 300PL6 J4-24 8 300PL9 J4-24
+15V_CMD 300PL6J8-12 5 300PL5 J11-6
+15V_CMD 300PL6J8-6 5 300PL8 J9-6
+15V_CMD 300PL8 J3-20 19 300PL10 J1-20
+15V_CMD 300PL8 J3-22 19 300PL10 J1-22
+15V_CMD 300PL8 J3-24 19 300PL10 J1-24
+15V_CMD 300PL8 J3-26 19 300PL10 J1-26
+15V_CMD 300PL8 J3-28 19 300PL10 J1-28
+15V_DRIV 300PL6 J6-23 9 300PL11 J1-23
+15V_DRIV 300PL6 J6-24 9 300PL11 J1-24
+15V_GATE 300PL8 J3-11 19 300PL10 J1-11
+15V_GATE 300PL8 J3-13 19 300PL10 J1-13
+15V_GATE 300PL8 J3-7 19 300PL10 J1-7
+15V_GATE 300PL8 J3-9 19 300PL10 J1-9
+15V_ON 300PL9 J4-16 8 300PL6 J4-16
+27VDC_CONT_PANEL 300PL13 J1-10 14 300PL9 J6-1
+27VDC_ELEV_COMP 300PL13 J1-7 14 300PL1 J5-1
+27VDC_ELEV_COMP 300PL13 J1-8 14 300PL1 J5-2
+27VDC_LIGHT_ROT 300PL13 J1-1 14 300PL2 J3-1
+30V_ALIM JP202-1 202 200L1
+30V_ROTATION JP201-1 201 200Y2
+30V_STATIF 200PL3 J2-1 226 200PL10 J2-1A
Chapter 4 Page no. 144 Signal.fm

Signal Name List
+30V_STATIF 300PL5 J6-15 103 200PL9 J1-15
+30V_STATIF 300PL5 J6-16 103 200PL9 J1-16
+30V_STATIF 300PL5 J7-25 104 200PL1 J1-25
+30V_STATIF 300PL5 J9-7 102 200PL3-J1-7
+5V VCC 300PL5 J10-12 2 300PL2 J1-12
+5V VCC 300PL5 J12-13 1 300PL1 J1-13
+5V VCC 300PL5 J12-14 1 300PL1 J1-14
+5V VCC 300PL5 J12-21 1 300PL1 J1-21
+5V VCC 300PL5 J12-22 1 300PL1 J1-22
+5V VCC 300PL5 J13-3 3 300PL3 J1-3
+5V VCC 300PL5 J13-5 3 300PL3 J1-5
+5VBF 300PL7 SK2-2 31 300PL17 J4-4
+5VBF 300PL7 SK2-3 31 300PL17 J4-7
+5VS 300PL17 J1-6 7 300PL6 J9-6
+5VS 300PL6 J4-1 8 300PL9 J4-1
+5VS 300PL6 J4-3 8 300PL9 J4-3
+5VS 300PL6 J4-5 8 300PL9 J4-5
+5VS 300PL9 J7-1 16 300PL14 J4-1
+5VS 300PL9 J7-3 16 300PL14 J4-3
+CAPA 300PL9 18 300PL10
+LVPS_SUPPLY 300PL17 J2-1 30 300PL7 SK1-1
+SUPPLY_HEATER 300PL9 J3-10 12 300PL11 J3-6
+SUPPLY_HEATER 300PL9 J3-7 12 300PL11 J3-3
+SUPPLY_START 300PL9 J3-1 12 300PL12 J3-3
+SUPPLY_START 300PL9 J3-4 12 300PL12 J3-6
-15V 300PL17 J1-4 7 300PL6 J9-4
-15V 300PL6 J6-7 9 300PL11 J1-7
-15V 300PL6 J6-8 9 300PL11 J1-8
-15V 300PL6J8-1 5 300PL8 J9-1
-15V 300PL6J8-7 5 300PL5 J11-1
-15V/-15VF 300PL5 J10-13 2 300PL2 J1-13

Signal Name List
-15V/-15VF 300PL5 J12-25 1 300PL1 J1-25
-15V/-15VF 300PL5 J12-26 1 300PL1 J1-26
-15VBF 300PL7 SK2-6 31 300PL17 J4-2
-15VF 300PL5 J6-25 103 200PL9 J1-25
-15VF 300PL5 J8-13 101 200PL5 J4-13
-15VF 300PL5 J9-15 102 200PL3-J1-15
-15VF 300PL5 J9-16 102 200PL3-J1-16
-15VS 300PL17 J1-1 7 300PL6 J9-1
-CAPA 300PL9 18 300PL10
-DC_BUS 300PL9 J3-12 12 300PL11 J3-4
-DC_BUS 300PL9 J3-9 12 300PL11 J3-1
-HT 200PL5 J1 219 Photomultiplier
-LVPS_SUPPLY 300PL17 J2-3 30 300PL7 SK1-3
-SUPPLY_START 300PL9 J3-3 12 300PL12 J3-1
-SUPPLY_START 300PL9 J3-6 12 300PL12 J3-4
0V/GND 300PL1 J10A-6 17a PADDLE-A
0V/GND 300PL1 J10B-6 17b PADDLE-B
0V/GND 300PL11 J2-10 11 HV TANK GKB-
0V/GND 300PL11 J2-7 11 HV TANK GKB-
0V/GND 300PL5 J10-1 2 300PL2 J1-1
0V/GND 300PL5 J10-16 2 300PL2 J1-16
0V/GND 300PL5 J10-3 2 300PL2 J1-3
0V/GND 300PL5 J10-5 2 300PL2 J1-5
0V/GND 300PL5 J12-1 1 300PL1 J1-1
0V/GND 300PL5 J12-10 1 300PL1 J1-10
0V/GND 300PL5 J12-33 1 300PL1 J1-33
0V/GND 300PL5 J12-34 1 300PL1 J1-34
0V/GND 300PL5 J13-1 3 300PL3 J1-1
0V/GND 300PL5 J13-7 3 300PL3 J1-7
0V/GND 300PL5 J13-9 3 300PL3 J1-9
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-1 4 300PL6 J2-1

Signal Name List
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-12 4 300PL6 J2-12
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-15 4 300PL6 J2-15
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-18 4 300PL6 J2-18
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-22 4 300PL6 J2-22
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-25 4 300PL6 J2-25
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-31 4 300PL6 J2-31
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-34 4 300PL6 J2-34
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-44 4 300PL6 J2-44
0V/GND 300PL5 J3-9 4 300PL6 J2-9
0V/GND 300PL5 J9-1 102 200PL3-J1-1
0V/GND 300PL5 J9-3 102 200PL3-J1-3
0V/GND 300PL5 J9-5 102 200PL3-J1-5
0V/GND 300PL6 J4-31 8 300PL9 J4-31
0V/GND 300PL6 J4-32 8 300PL9 J4-32
0V/GND 300PL6 J4-33 8 300PL9 J4-33
0V/GND 300PL6 J4-34 8 300PL9 J4-34
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-13 9 300PL11 J1-13
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-15 9 300PL11 J1-15
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-16 9 300PL11 J1-16
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-18 9 300PL11 J1-18
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-20 9 300PL11 J1-20
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-21 9 300PL11 J1-21
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-22 9 300PL11 J1-22
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-25 9 300PL11 J1-25
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-26 9 300PL11 J1-26
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-5 9 300PL11 J1-5
0V/GND 300PL6 J6-6 9 300PL11 J1-6
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-15 19 300PL10 J1-15
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-16 19 300PL10 J1-16
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-17 19 300PL10 J1-17
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-18 19 300PL10 J1-18

Signal Name List
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-19 19 300PL10 J1-19
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-21 19 300PL10 J1-21
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-23 19 300PL10 J1-23
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-25 19 300PL10 J1-25
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-27 19 300PL10 J1-27
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-29 19 300PL10 J1-29
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-32 19 300PL10 J1-32
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-34 19 300PL10 J1-34
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-5 19 300PL10 J1-5
0V/GND 300PL8 J3-6 19 300PL10 J1-6
0V/GROUND HV TANK GKB-15 11 300PL8 J10-1
0VP JP202-2 202 200L1
0V_PHASE_1 300PL12 J1-26 10 300PL6 J5-26
0V_PHASE_3 300PL12 J1-28 10 300PL6 J5-28
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-11 14 300PL1 J5-4
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-12 14 300PL1 J5-5
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-3 14 300PL2 J3-4
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-5 14 300PL2 J3-5
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-6 14 300PL2 J3-6
0_27VDC 300PL13 J1-9 14 300PL9 J6-3
0_27VDC 300PL9 J5-11 13 100PL2 J3-11
0_27VDC 300PL9 J5-12 13 100PL2 J3-12
0_27VDC 300PL9 J5-24 13 100PL2 J3-24
0_27VDC 300PL9 J5-25 13 100PL2 J3-25
11V 200PL7 J1-1 213 200PL1 J13-1
18x24 200PL1 J9-3 207 200PL2 J1-3
24X30 200PL3-J1-6 102 300PL5 J9-6
24X30_SIZE 200PL10 J2-5 226 200PL3 J2-10
24x30 200PL1 J9-4 207 200PL2 J1-4
30V/30V STATIF 300PL2 J1-11 2 300PL5 J10-11
30V/30V STATIF 300PL2 J1-7 2 300PL5 J10-7

Signal Name List
30V/30V STATIF 300PL2 J1-9 2 300PL5 J10-9
AC_N_PH2 300-S1 20 300PL9
AC_N_PH2 300PL9 J10-4 15 300PL17 J3-4
AC_N_PH2 300PL9 J9-3 28 300PL18 J1-1
AC_PH1 300-S1 20 300PL9
AC_PH1 300-S1 14 27 300PL9 J11-3
AC_PH1_PRE 300PL9 J9-1 28 300PL18 J1-3
AC_PH1_RETURN 300-S1 13 27 300PL9 J11-1
AC_PH1_RETURN 300PL9 J10-1 15 300PL17 J3-1
ANGLE 200PL9 J4-2 216 200R1
ANGLE+ 200PL9 J1-14 103 300PL5 J6-14
ANGLE- 200PL9 J1-13 103 300PL5 J6-13
BIAS_CDE_T1 300PL6 J6-19 9 300PL11 J1-19
BIAS_CDE_T2 300PL6 J6-17 9 300PL11 J1-17
BIAS_FREQ+ 300PL5 J3-24 4 300PL6 J2-24
BIAS_FREQ- 300PL5 J3-23 4 300PL6 J2-23
BIAS_OK 300PL6 J2-27 4 300PL5 J3-27
BIAS_ON 300PL5 J3-26 4 300PL6 J2-26
BIAS_TRANSF_A 300PL11 J2-4 11 HV TANK GKB-
BIAS_TRANSF_B 300PL11 J2-1 11 HV TANK GKB-
BIAS_VOLT_MEAS_A 300PL11 J1-29 9 300PL6 J6-29
BIAS_VOLT_MEAS_B 300PL11 J1-30 9 300PL6 J6-30
BLOC_T1 300PL6 J5-3 10 300PL12 J1-3
BLOC_T1 300PL6 J5-5 10 300PL12 J1-5
BLOC_T2 300PL6 J5-4 10 300PL12 J1-4
BLOC_T2 300PL6 J5-6 10 300PL12 J1-6
BLOC_T3 300PL6 J5-11 10 300PL12 J1-11
BLOC_T3 300PL6 J5-9 10 300PL12 J1-9
BLOC_T4 300PL6 J5-10 10 300PL12 J1-10
BLOC_T4 300PL6 J5-12 10 300PL12 J1-12
BLOC_T5 300PL6 J5-15 10 300PL12 J1-15

Signal Name List
BLOC_T5 300PL6 J5-17 10 300PL12 J1-17
BLOC_T6 300PL6 J5-16 10 300PL12 J1-16
BLOC_T6 300PL6 J5-18 10 300PL12 J1-18
BRAKE_STARTER 300PL5 J3-8 4 300PL6 J2-8
BUCKY_FAIL 200PL3-J1-13 102 300PL5 J9-13
B_ON 300PL9 J5-19 13 100PL2 J3-19
CASSETTE_PRES 200PL10 J2-5 226 200PL3 J2-9
CASSETTE_PRES 200PL3-J1-2 102 300PL5 J9-2
CDE_T1 300PL6 J5-1 10 300PL12 J1-1
CDE_T2 300PL6 J5-2 10 300PL12 J1-2
CDE_T3 300PL6 J5-7 10 300PL12 J1-7
CDE_T4 300PL6 J5-8 10 300PL12 J1-8
CDE_T5 300PL6 J5-13 10 300PL12 J1-13
CDE_T6 300PL6 J5-14 10 300PL12 J1-14
CEMF_ELEV+ 300PL1 J1-24 1 300PL5 J12-24
CEMF_ELEV- 300PL1 J1-23 1 300PL5 J12-23
CMD_LIGHT_ON 300PL9 J7-2 16 300PL14
CMD_LIGHT_XRAY 300PL6 J4-25 8 300PL9 J4-25
CMD_LIGHT_XRAY 300PL9 J7-4 16 300PL14
CMeasA 300PL10 J1-2 19 300PL8 J3-2
CMeasB 300PL10 J1-4 19 300PL8 J3-4
COMMON 300PL1 J10A-3 17a PADDLE-A
COMMON 300PL1 J10B-3 17b PADDLE-B
COMMON_SW 300PL5 J3-38 4 300PL6 J2-38
COMMON_SW 300PL6 J4-10 8 300PL9 J4-10
COMMON_SW 300PL9 J5-3 13 100PL2 J3-3
COMMON_SW 300PL9 J5-4 13 100PL2 J3-4
COMMUN_ELEV+_PRES_S 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-3

W
COMMUN_ELEV+_PRES_S 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-3

W
COMMUN_ELEV-_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-5

Signal Name List
COMMUN_ELEV-_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-5
COMMUN_LIGHT_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-9
COMMUN_LIGHT_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-9
COMMUN_OPER_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-1
COMMUN_OPER_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-1
COMMUN_ROT_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-7
COMMUN_ROT_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-7
COMPRESSION 300PL1 J10A-1 17a PADDLE-A
COMPRESSION 300PL1 J10B-1 17b PADDLE-B
COMP_ON 300PL5 J12-3 1 300PL1 J1-3
COMP_STATE_OFF 300PL1 J1-7 1 300PL5 J12-7
CONS_FORCE+ 200PL1 J1-10 104 300PL5 J7-10
CONS_FORCE+ 200PL7 J1-2 213 200PL1 J13-2
CONS_FORCE- 200PL1 J1-9 104 300PL5 J7-9
CONS_FORCE- 200PL7 J1-3 213 200PL1 J13-3
CONTACT+ 300PL1 J7-1 113 200S5
CONTACT+ 300PL1 J8-1 112 200S4
CONTACT+ 300PL1 J9-1 111 200S3
CONTACT- 300PL1 J7-3 113 200S5
CONTACT- 300PL1 J8-3 112 200S4
CONTACT- 300PL1 J9-3 111 200S3
CONT_RX+ 300PL5 J3-32 4 300PL6 J2-32
CONT_RX+ 300PL6 J4-8 8 300PL9 J4-8
CONT_RX+ 300PL9 J5-15 13 100PL2 J3-15
CONT_RX- 300PL5 J3-33 4 300PL6 J2-33
CONT_RX- 300PL6 J4-6 8 300PL9 J4-6
CONT_RX- 300PL9 J5-2 13 100PL2 J3-2
CONT_TX+ 100PL2 J3-14 13 300PL9 J5-14
CONT_TX+ 300PL6 J2-30 4 300PL5 J3-30
CONT_TX+ 300PL9 J4-2 8 300PL6 J4-2
CONT_TX- 100PL2 J3-1 13 300PL9 J5-1

Signal Name List
CONT_TX- 300PL6 J2-29 4 300PL5 J3-29
CONT_TX- 300PL9 J4-4 8 300PL6 J4-4
DC_BUS_OK 300PL5 J5-25 6 300PL8 J2-25
DC_BUS_OK 300PL6 J2-42 4 300PL5 J3-42
DECOMPRESSION 300PL1 J10A-4 17a PADDLE-A
DECOMPRESSION 300PL1 J10B-4 17b PADDLE-B
DIAPH(0) 200PL1 J1-4 104 300PL5 J7-4
DIAPH(1) 200PL1 J1-3 104 300PL5 J7-3
DIAPH(2) 200PL1 J1-6 104 300PL5 J7-5
DIAPH(3) 200PL1 J1-5 104 300PL5 J7-6
DISPLAY_LOAD+(0) 300PL5 J4-4 114 200PL4 J1-4
DISPLAY_LOAD-(0) 300PL5 J4-3 114 200PL4 J1-3
DISPLAY_STROBE+ 300PL5 J4-12 114 200PL4 J1-12
DISPLAY_STROBE- 300PL5 J4-11 114 200PL4 J1-11
ELEV+ 300PL1 J2-1 116 JP204 1
ELEV+ JP204 1 115 200M1
ELEV+_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-4
ELEV+_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-4
ELEV+_SW 200PL1 J1-1 104 300PL5 J7-1
ELEV- 300PL1 J2-2 116 JP204 2
ELEV- JP204 2 115 200M1
ELEV-_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-6
ELEV-_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-6
ELEV-_SW 200PL1 J1-2 104 300PL5 J7-2
ELEV_H_STOP 300PL1 J1-30 1 300PL5 J12-30

Signal Name List
ELEV_L_STOP 300PL1 J1-29 1 300PL5 J12-29
ELEV_ON 300PL5 J12-5 1 300PL1 J1-5
ELEV_SECURITY 300PL1 J1-31 1 300PL5 J12-31
ELEV_STATE_OFF 300PL1 J1-8 1 300PL5 J12-8
EMERGENCY_SW1 200PL1 J1-24 104 300PL5 J7-24
EMERGENCY_SW1 200PL1 J8-1 205 JP204
EMERGENCY_SW1 JP204 204 200S1
EMERGENCY_SW2 200PL1 J8-2 205 JP205
EMERGENCY_SW2 JP205 204 200S2
EVENT_COUNT 300PL5 J13-10 3 300PL3 J1-10
EXPOSURE 300PL5 J3-35 4 300PL6 J2-35
EXPO_DIS_LED 300PL5 J9-12 102 200PL3-J1-12
FAN+ 200PL1 J2-1 203 200Y1
FAN_DETECT 200PL1 J1-26 104 300PL5 J7-26
FAN_OK 200PL1 J2-2 203 200Y1
FEEDBACK_MA HV TANK GKB-14 11 300PL8 J10-1
FILTER_POS_REF 200PL9 J1-2 103 300PL5 J6-2
FILTER_POS_REF 200PL9 J2-3 214 200B1
FILTER_STDBY 300PL5 J6-24 103 200PL9 J1-24
FOOT_SW_COMP 300PL1 J1-4 1 300PL5 J12-4
FOOT_SW_DECOMP 300PL1 J1-6 1 300PL5 J12-6
FOOT_SW_PRES 300PL1 J1-2 1 300PL5 J12-2
G1CMD1 300PL8 J3-3 19 300PL10 J1-3
G1CMD2 300PL8 J3-1 19 300PL10 J1-1

Signal Name List
G2CMD1 300PL8 J3-31 19 300PL10 J1-31
G2CMD2 300PL8 J3-33 19 300PL10 J1-33
GF 200PL1 J10-3 208 200PL2 J2-3
GND 200PL1 J10-5 208 200PL2 J2-5
GND 200PL1 J2-3 203 200Y1
GND 200PL1 J9-5 207 200PL2 J1-5
GND 200PL3 J2-2 226 200PL10 J2-1A
GND 200PL5 J3-2 220 Photomultiplier
GND 200PL7 J1-8 213 200PL1 J13-8
GND 200PL8 J1-4 212 200PL7J2-4
GND 200PL9 J2-4 214 200B1
GND 200PL9 J4-3 216 200R1
GND 200PL9 J5-3 217 JP203
GND 200PL9 J6-1 218 200PL6 J1-1
GND 300PL3 J2-5 33 PDD
GND 300PL3 J3-5 32 LAPTOP
GND 300PL5 J4-1 114 200PL4 J1-1
GND 300PL5 J4-16 114 200PL4 J1-16
GND 300PL5 J6-11 103 200PL9 J1-11
GND 300PL5 J6-12 103 200PL9 J1-12
GND 300PL5 J6-23 103 200PL9 J1-23
GND 300PL5 J6-8 103 200PL9 J1-8
GND 300PL5 J7-19 104 200PL1 J1-19
GND 300PL5 J7-7 104 200PL1 J1-7
GND 300PL5 J7-8 104 200PL1 J1-8
GND 300PL5 J8-1 101 200PL5 J4-1
GND 300PL5 J8-16 101 200PL5 J4-16
GND 300PL5 J8-9 101 200PL5 J4-9
GND JP203 209 200S2
GND Photomultiplier 210 GROUND
GRAPHY_BUTTON 300PL9 J5-17 13 100PL2 J3-17

Signal Name List
GRAPHY_BUTTON 300PL9 J7-7 16 300PL14 J4-7
GRAPHY_SW_IN 300PL6 J2-37 4 300PL5 J3-37
GRAPHY_SW_OUT 300PL5 J5-29 6 300PL8 J2-29
GRID_ABSCENCE 200PL10 J2-4 226 200PL3 J2-8
GRID_PRES 200PL3-J1-4 102 300PL5 J9-4
GROUND 31 300PL17 J4-12
GROUND 300PL17 J1-11 7 300PL6 J9-11
GROUND 300PL17 J1-5 7 300PL6 J9-5
GROUND 300PL17 J1-8 7 300PL6 J9-8
GROUND 300PL6J8-10 5 300PL5 J11-4
GROUND 300PL6J8-11 5 300PL5 J11-5
GROUND 300PL6J8-4 5 300PL8 J9-4
GROUND 300PL6J8-5 5 300PL8 J9-11
GROUND 300PL7 SK2-4 31 300PL17 J4-6
GROUND 300PL7 SK2-5 31 300PL17 J4-9
GROUND 300PL8 J2-1 6 300PL5 J5-1
GROUND 300PL8 J2-10 6 300PL5 J5-10
GROUND 300PL8 J2-13 6 300PL5 J5-13
GROUND 300PL8 J2-4 6 300PL5 J5-4
GROUND 300PL8 J2-7 6 300PL5 J5-7
GROUND 300PL9 J5-8 13 100PL2 J3-8
HEAT_CUR_MEAS_A 300PL11 J1-11 9 300PL6 J6-11
HEAT_CUR_MEAS_B 300PL11 J1-12 9 300PL6 J6-12
HEAT_LOAD+ 300PL5 J3-16 4 300PL6 J2-16
HEAT_LOAD- 300PL5 J3-17 4 300PL6 J2-17
HEAT_OK 300PL6 J2-21 4 300PL5 J3-21
HEAT_ON 300PL5 J3-20 4 300PL6 J2-20
HEAT_STROBE+ 300PL5 J3-14 4 300PL6 J2-14
HEAT_STROBE- 300PL5 J3-13 4 300PL6 J2-13

Signal Name List
HEAT_TRANSF_COMMON 300PL11 J2-12 11 HV TANK GKB-
HEAT_TRANSF_COMMON 300PL11 J2-9 11 HV TANK GKB-
HEAT_TRANSF_TRACK_1 300PL11 J2-3 11 HV TANK GKB-
HEAT_TRANSF_TRACK_2 300PL11 J2-6 11 HV TANK GKB-
HEAT_TRIG_1_A 300PL6 J6-2 9 300PL11 J1-2
HEAT_TRIG_1_B 300PL6 J6-4 9 300PL11 J1-4
HEAT_TRIG_2_A 300PL6 J6-1 9 300PL11 J1-1
HEAT_TRIG_2_B 300PL6 J6-3 9 300PL11 J1-3
HIGH_ANGLE 200PL9 J4-1 216 200R1
HIGH_THICKNESS 200PL9 J5-1 217 JP203
HIGH_THICKNESS JP203 209 200S2
HOME 200PL10 J2-4 226 200PL3 J2-7
HT+ HV TANK 108 X_RAY TUBE
HT- HV TANK 109 X_RAY TUBE
HTPM_LOAD+ 300PL5 J8-6 101 200PL5 J4-6
HTPM_LOAD- 300PL5 J8-5 101 200PL5 J4-5
HTPM_STROBE+ 300PL5 J8-8 101 200PL5 J4-8
HTPM_STROBE- 300PL5 J8-7 101 200PL5 J4-7
HV_LOAD+ 300PL5 J5-8 6 300PL8 J2-8
HV_LOAD- 300PL5 J5-9 6 300PL8 J2-9
HV_OK 300PL8 J2-32 6 300PL5 J5-32
HV_STROBE+ 300PL5 J5-6 6 300PL8 J2-6
HV_STROBE- 300PL5 J5-5 6 300PL8 J2-5
HV_TEST 300PL5 J5-33 6 300PL8 J2-33
INC_KNOB1 200PL8 J1-2 212 200PL7J2-2
INC_KNOB1+ 200PL1 J1-14 104 300PL5 J7-14
INC_KNOB1+ 200PL7 J1-4 213 200PL1 J13-4
INC_KNOB1- 200PL1 J1-13 104 300PL5 J7-13
INC_KNOB1- 200PL7 J1-5 213 200PL1 J13-5
INC_KNOB2 200PL8 J1-3 212 200PL7J2-3
INC_KNOB2+ 200PL1 J1-18 104 300PL5 J7-18

Signal Name List
INC_KNOB2+ 200PL7 J1-6 213 200PL1 J13-6
INC_KNOB2- 200PL1 J1-17 104 300PL5 J7-17
INC_KNOB2- 200PL7 J1-7 213 200PL1 J13-7
INRUSH_REL_1 300PL9 J10-3 15 300PL17 J3-3
I_HT_CMD 300PL5 J8-14 101 200PL5 J4-14
Ipm 200PL5 J3-1 220 Photomultiplier
KV_MEAS 300PL15 J1 21 300PL8 J4
KV_SUP_5/KV_INF_5 300PL8 J2-15 6 300PL5 J5-15
LAPTOP_RX 300PL3 J1-8 3 300PL5 J13-8
LAPTOP_RX LAPTOP 32 300PL3 J3-2
LAPTOP_TX 300PL3 J3-3 32 LAPTOP
LAPTOP_TX 300PL5 J13-6 3 300PL3 J1-6
LED+_FILTER 200PL9 J2-1 214 200B1
LED-_FILTER 200PL9 J2-2 214 200B1
LED1+ 200PL1 J9-1 207 200PL2 J1-1
LED1- 200PL1 J10-1 208 200PL2 J2-1
LED1- 200PL1 J9-2 207 200PL2 J1-2
LED2- 200PL1 J10-2 208 200PL2 J2-2
LIGHT+ 300PL2 J4-A 105 200L1/W202
LIGHT- 300PL2 J4-B 105 200L1/W202
LIGHT_FAIL 300PL2 J1-8 2 300PL5 J10-8
LIGHT_ON 300PL5 J10-4 2 300PL2 J1-4
LIGHT_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-10
LIGHT_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-10
LIGHT_SW 200PL1 J1-16 104 300PL5 J7-16
M3 300PL10 22 HV TANK GKA-1
M5 300PL10 22 HV TANK GKA-2
MAG_0 200PL9 J1-4 103 300PL5 J6-4
MAG_0 200PL9 J6-2 218 200PL6 J1-2

Signal Name List
MAG_1 200PL9 J1-5 103 300PL5 J6-5
MAG_1 200PL9 J6-3 218 200PL6 J1-3
MAG_2 200PL9 J1-6 103 300PL5 J6-6
MAINS PH1 50
MAINS PH2/N 50 300PL6
MAINS_OK 300PL5 J5-23 6 300PL8 J2-23
MAINS_OK 300PL6 J2-41 4 300PL5 J3-41
MAINT_STARTER 300PL5 J3-7 4 300PL6 J2-7
MA_MEAS+ 300PL8 J2-12 6 300PL5 J5-12
MA_MEAS- 300PL8 J2-11 6 300PL5 J5-11
MESURE_PHASE_1 300PL12 J1-25 10 300PL6 J5-25
MESURE_PHASE_3 300PL12 J1-27 10 300PL6 J5-27
MOT_COMP1 300PL5 J12-28 1 300PL1 J1-28
MOT_COMP2 300PL5 J12-27 1 300PL1 J1-27
MOT_FILTER1+ 300PL5 J6-18 103 200PL9 J1-18
MOT_FILTER1- 300PL5 J6-17 103 200PL9 J1-17
MOT_FILTER2+ 300PL5 J6-22 103 200PL9 J1-22
MOT_FILTER2- 300PL5 J6-21 103 200PL9 J1-21
NC 27 300PL9 J11-2
NC 200PL1 J1-20 104 300PL5 J7-20
NC 200PL1 J1-27 104 300PL5 J7-27
NC 200PL1 J1-28 104 300PL5 J7-28
NC 200PL1 J1-29 104 300PL5 J7-29
NC 200PL1 J1-30 104 300PL5 J7-30
NC 200PL1 J1-31 104 300PL5 J7-31
NC 200PL1 J1-32 104 300PL5 J7-32
NC 200PL1 J1-33 104 300PL5 J7-33
NC 200PL1 J1-34 104 300PL5 J7-34
NC 200PL3 J2-11 226 200PL10 J2-6
NC 200PL3 J2-12 226 200PL10 J2-6
NC 200PL9 J1-1 103 300PL5 J6-1

Signal Name List
NC 200PL9 J1-26 103 300PL5 J6-26
NC 200PL9 J1-3 103 300PL5 J6-3
NC 200PL9 J1-7 103 300PL5 J6-7
NC 300PL1 J1-32 1 300PL5 J12-32
NC 300PL1 J1-9 1 300PL5 J12-9
NC 300PL1 J10A-5 17a PADDLE-A
NC 300PL1 J10B-5 17b PADDLE-B
NC 300PL1 J7-2 113
NC 300PL1 J8-2 112
NC 300PL1 J9-2 111
NC 300PL17 J2-2 30 300PL7 SK1-2
NC 300PL18 J2-2 29
NC 300PL2 J1-14 2 300PL5 J10-14
NC 300PL2 J1-15 2 300PL5 J10-15
NC 300PL3 J2-1 33
NC 300PL3 J2-4 33
NC 300PL3 J2-6 33
NC 300PL3 J2-7 33
NC 300PL3 J2-8 33
NC 300PL3 J2-9 33
NC 300PL3 J3-1 33
NC 300PL3 J3-4 32
NC 300PL3 J3-6 32
NC 300PL3 J3-7 32
NC 300PL3 J3-8 32
NC 300PL3 J3-9 32
NC 300PL5 J3-28 4 300PL6 J2-28
NC 300PL5 J3-45 4 300PL6 J2-45
NC 300PL5 J3-46 4 300PL6 J2-46
NC 300PL5 J3-47 4 300PL6 J2-47
NC 300PL5 J3-48 4 300PL6 J2-48

Signal Name List
NC 300PL5 J3-49 4 300PL6 J2-49
NC 300PL5 J3-50 4 300PL6 J2-50
NC 300PL5 J8-15 101 200PL5 J4-15
NC 300PL5 J9-17 102 200PL3-J1-17
NC 300PL5 J9-18 102 200PL3-J1-18
NC 300PL5 J9-19 102 200PL3-J1-19
NC 300PL5 J9-20 102 200PL3-J1-20
NC 300PL8 J2-34 6 300PL5 J5-34
NC 300PL8 J2-35 6 300PL5 J5-35
NC 300PL8 J2-36 6 300PL5 J5-36
NC 300PL8 J2-37 6 300PL5 J5-37
NC 300PL8 J2-38 6 300PL5 J5-38
NC 300PL8 J2-39 6 300PL5 J5-39
NC 300PL8 J2-40 6 300PL5 J5-40
NC 300PL9 J10-2 15 300PL17 J3-2
NC 300PL9 J10-5 15 300PL17 J3-5
NC 300PL9 J5-13 13
NC 300PL9 J5-18 13
NC 300PL9 J5-5 13
NC 300PL9 J9-2 28 300PL18 J1-2
OPERATOR PRESENCE 300PL1 J10A-2 17a PADDLE-A
OPERATOR PRESENCE 300PL1 J10B-2 17b PADDLE-B
OPER_PRES_SW 200PL1 J1-15 104 300PL5 J7-15
OPER_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-2
OPER_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-2
PDD_RX 300PL3 J1-4 3 300PL5 J13-4
PDD_RX PDD 33 300PL3 J2-2
PDD_TX 300PL3 J2-3 33 PDD
PDD_TX 300PL5 J13-2 3 300PL3 J1-2
PE/GND 50 300PL6
PF 200PL1 J10-4 208 200PL2 J2-4

Signal Name List
PHASE+R 300PL1 J6-4 100 JP200-4
PHASE+R JP200 -4 200 200M2
PHASE-Y 300PL1 J6-3 100 JP200-3
PHASE-Y JP200 -3 200 200M2
PHASE1+O 300PL1 J6-2 100 JP200-2
PHASE1+O JP200 -2 200 200M2
PHASE1-B 300PL1 J6-1 100 JP200-1
PHASE1-B JP200 -1 200 200M2
PHASE_1 300PL12 J2-2 110 X_RAY TUBE
PHASE_1+ 200PL3 J2-3 226 200PL10 J2-2
PHASE_1- 200PL3 J2-4 226 200PL10 J2-2
PHASE_2 300PL12 J2-4 110 X_RAY TUBE
PHASE_2+ 200PL3 J2-5 226 200PL10 J2-3
PHASE_2- 200PL3 J2-6 226 200PL10 J2-3
PHASE_3 300PL&amp2 J2-6 110 X_RAY TUBE
PM_MEAS+ 200PL5 J4-12 101 300PL5 J8-12
PM_MEAS- 200PL5 J4-11 101 300PL5 J8-11
POW_MOT_FILTER1+ 200PL9 J3-2 215 200M3
POW_MOT_FILTER1- 200PL9 J3-1 215 200M3
POW_MOT_FILTER2+ 200PL9 J3-4 215 200M3
POW_MOT_FILTER2- 200PL9 J3-3 215 200M3
PREPA_BUTTON 300PL9 J5-16 13 100PL2 J3-16
PREPA_BUTTON 300PL9 J7-9 16 300PL14
PREPA_SW_IN 300PL6 J2-36 4 300PL5 J3-36
PREPA_SW_IN 300PL9 J4-29 8 300PL6 J4-29
PREPA_SW_IN 300PL9 J7-10 16 300PL14
PWM_COMP1+ 300PL5 J12-12 1 300PL1 J1-12
PWM_COMP1- 300PL5 J12-11 1 300PL1 J1-11
PWM_COMP2+ 300PL5 J12-16 1 300PL1 J1-16
PWM_COMP2- 300PL5 J12-15 1 300PL1 J1-15
PWM_ELEV+ 300PL5 J12-20 1 300PL1 J1-20

Signal Name List
PWM_ELEV- 300PL5 J12-19 1 300PL1 J1-19
R1(+5v Charge) 300PL17 J4-5 31
R1(+5v Charge) 300PL17 J4-8 31
R2(+15v Charge) 300PL17 J4-11 31
R2(+15v Charge) 300PL17 J4-12 31
ROT+ 300PL2 J2-A 106 200Y2/W201
ROT- 300PL2 J2-B 106 200Y2/W201
ROT_ON 300PL5 J10-2 2 300PL2 J1-2
ROT_PRES_SW 200S6a 230a 200PL1 J11-8
ROT_PRES_SW 200S6b 230b 200PL1 J12-8
ROT_STAT_OFF 300PL2 J1-6 2 300PL5 J10-6
ROT_SW 200PL1 J1-21 104 300PL5 J7-21
R_ON_POWER JP201-2 201 200Y2
Red_Led_Anode 200PL3 J3-2 211 200H1
Red_Led_Cathode 200PL3 J3-1 211 200H1
SECURITY_READ 300PL5 J5-14 6 300PL8 J2-14
SRI_DISPLAY+ 300PL5 J4-8 114 200PL4 J1-8
SRI_DISPLAY- 300PL5 J4-7 114 200PL4 J1-7
SRI_HEAT+ 300PL5 J3-10 4 300PL6 J2-10
SRI_HEAT- 300PL5 J3-11 4 300PL6 J2-11
SRI_HTPM+ 300PL5 J8-4 101 200PL5 J4-4
SRI_HTPM- 300PL5 J8-3 101 200PL5 J4-3
SRI_HV+ 300PL5 J5-2 6 300PL8 J2-2
SRI_HV- 300PL5 J5-3 6 300PL8 J2-3
STARTER_OK 300PL6 J2-3 4 300PL5 J3-3
STARTER_ON 300PL5 J3-2 4 300PL6 J2-2
STARTER_SPEED 300PL6 J2-6 4 300PL5 J3-6
START_GRID 300PL5 J9-8 102 200PL3-J1-8
SUR_I_B 300PL12 J1-34 10 300PL6 J5-34
SUR_I_H 300PL12 J1-33 10 300PL6 J5-33
SYNC_GRID 200PL3-J1-10 102 300PL5 J9-10

Signal Name List
THICKNESS 200PL9 J5-2 217 JP203
THICKNESS JP203 209 200S2
THICKNESS+ 200PL9 J1-10 103 300PL5 J6-10
THICKNESS- 200PL9 J1-9 103 300PL5 J6-9
TUBE_SECURITY 200PL1 J1-22 104 300PL5 J7-22
TUBE_SECURITY 200PL1 J3-2 206 TUBE
TUBE_SECURITY+ 200PL1 J3-1 206 TUBE
VCC 200PL8 J1-1 212 200PL7J2-1
VCC 300PL5 J4-15 114 200PL4 J1-15
VCC 300PL5 J4-2 114 200PL4 J1-2
VCC 300PL5 J8-2 101 200PL5 J4-2
VCC_ 300PL17 J1-12 7 300PL6 J9-12
VCC_ 300PL17 J1-9 7 300PL6 J9-9
VCC_ 300PL6J8-2 5 300PL8 J9-2
VCC_ 300PL6J8-8 5 300PL5 J11-2
V_OFF 300PL9 J5-20 13 100PL2 J3-20
V_ON 300PL9 J5-7 13 100PL2 J3-7
XRAY_ON 300PL5 J5-17 6 300PL8 J2-17
_180V 300PL9 J4-19 8 300PL6 J4-19
_30V 300PL9 J4-20 8 300PL6 J4-20
_310V 300PL9 J4-18 8 300PL6 J4-18
_400V 300PL9 J4-17 8 300PL6 J4-17
_BLINK 300PL6 J4-9 8 300PL9 J4-9
_EXPOS_TIME_MAX 300PL8 J2-18 6 300PL5 J5-18
_HL_SECURITY 300PL8 J2-19 6 300PL5 J5-19
_HV_DROPOUT 300PL8 J2-26 6 300PL5 J5-26
_HV_MAX 300PL8 J2-28 6 300PL5 J5-28
_I_CONV_MAX 300PL8 J2-24 6 300PL5 J5-24
_LL_SECURITY 300PL8 J2-21 6 300PL5 J5-21
_LVPS_OK 300PL5 J5-27 6 300PL8 J2-27
_LVPS_OK 300PL6 J2-43 4 300PL5 J3-43

Signal Name List
_LVPS_OK2 300PL8 J3-30 19 300PL10 J1-30
_LVS_ON 300PL6 J9-3 7 300PL17 J1-3
_LVS_PRE 300PL6 J9-2 7 300PL17 J1-2
_MAINS_DETECT 300PL9 J4-15 8 300PL6 J4-15
_MA_MAX 300PL8 J2-30 6 300PL5 J5-30
_PWR_DISCH 300PL6 J4-28 8 300PL9 J4-28
_PWR_ON 300PL6 J4-26 8 300PL9 J4-26
_PWR_PRE 300PL6 J4-30 8 300PL9 J4-30
_SCW 300PL8 J2-22 6 300PL5 J5-22
_STARTER_ACCEL 300PL6 J2-5 4 300PL5 J3-5
_STARTER_ACCEL_IN 300PL9 J4-13 8 300PL6 J4-13
_STARTER_PRES 300PL6 J2-4 4 300PL5 J3-4
_STARTER_PRES_IN 300PL9 J4-14 8 300PL6 J4-14
_SUPPLY_DEFECT 300PL8 J2-16 6 300PL5 J5-16
_TIMEOUT_REGUL 300PL8 J2-20 6 300PL5 J5-20
_TRACK_2 300PL5 J3-19 4 300PL6 J2-19
_TRACK_2_SEL 300PL6 J6-14 9 300PL11 J1-14

FRU List (Renewal Parts)
CHAPTER 5 FRU LIST (RENEWAL PARTS)
1 PRESENTATION
This chapter provides the following:
• The information necessary to identify Renewal Parts (FRU) of Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition
System product.
• The Disassembly/Reassembly procedures (D/R Job cards) to replace defective Renewal Parts.
2 FRU LIST
FRU NAME FRU P/N FRU REPAIR- FRU FRU REFER- FRU FRU NOTE
TC ABLE D/R ENCE DES- QTY APP
M IGNATOR
SENOGRAPHE 2122182 / N 1
700T & 800T 2122184
. 300-ELECTRON- 2147570 N 1
ICS CABINET
. . 300-T1: 2147566 1 300T1 / 1

TRANSFO: GAN- 300PL18
TRY POWER SUP-
PLY EQUIP. WITH
300-PL18
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183979 1 F1,F2 2

FUSE 6x32 10A
250V ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183931 1 F3 1

FUSE 6x32 3,2A
250V ULL
. . MAINS (incoming 2147564 1 Repairable DR02 1

line) FILTER
EQUIPPED
. . . PCB: 300-PL14 2130696 1 300PL14 1

INTERLOCK
RELAYS BOARD
. . . MAINS FUSE 2141819 1 1

DISCONNECTOR
10X38 600V UL
. . . MAINS FUSE 99175457 1 300F1, 2

10X38 25A 600V C 300F2
(300-F1 300-F2)
FRU.fm Page no. 165 Chapter 5

M IGNATOR
. . 300-PL7 LOW 2147562 1 ALIM DR27 300PL7 1 This power

VOLTAGE POWER supply pro-
SUPPLY ASSEM- vides +5V +
BLY 15 V - 15 V.
There is no
schematic of
this power
supply in the
sm.
. . . FAST FUSE 2148403 1 1

5X20 3.15A 250V
. . HV TANK (High 2142950 1 Repairable DR03 1 NOTE: The

Voltage) BONSAI HV tank is
(V1) CDRH DIFFERENT
between a
700T/800T
and a DMR
. . PCB: 300-PL9 2141877 1 Repairable DR30 300PL9 1 IMPORTANT:

POWER SUPPLY approximatly
BOARD from January
97 a new
300PL9 is
introduced in
production.
. . . FAST FUSE 2149559-2 1 F1 1

10X38 5A 700V
ULL
. . . FAST FUSE 2149559 1 F2 1

10X38 10A 700V
ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183931 1 F3 1

FUSE 6X32 3.2A
250V ULL
. . . RELAY 12VCC 91682082 1 X1 1

3RT 16A CI
. . . DIODE BRIDGE 2113660 1 DR30 CR15, CR16 2

1 PH 600V 60A VIS
. . . RESISTOR 2115822 1 DR30 R85 1

100R 10% 250W
MET 5KV
Chapter 5 Page no. 166 FRU.fm

M IGNATOR
. . PCB: 300-PL11 2132211 1 Repairable DR27 300PL11 1

AUXILIARIES
POWER BOARD
. . PCB: 300-PL12 45553694 1 Repairable 300PL12 1 This rotor

ANODE STARTER power board is
POWER BOARD the same for
the DMR
. . PCB: 300-PL10 2145826 1 Repairable 300PL10 1

HIGH VOLTAGE
INVERTER BOARD
. . PCB: 300-PL6 2141876-2 1 Repairable DR27 300PL6 1 2141876-2

AUXILIARIES replaces
CONTROL BOARD 2141876
. . PCB: 300-PL8 2132779-2 1 Repairable DR27 300PL8 1 2132779-2

HIGH VOLTAGE replaces
CONTROL BOARD 2132779
. . PCB: 300-PL4 2127958-2 1 Repairable 300PL4 1 2127958-2

CPU BOARD Ver- (V2.11) replaces
sion V2-11 2127958
. . . LITHIUM BAT- 99171019 1 DR04 BT1 1

TERY 850 MAH

GENERATOR &
ARM INTERFACE
BOARD

LIGHT & ROTA-
TION BOARD
. . . FAST FUSE 2146116-2 1 F5 1

6x32 2A 250V ULL
. . . FAST FUSE 2146116-5 1 F1 1

6x32 8A 250V ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183979 1 F6 1

FUSE 6x32 10A
250V ULL
. . PCB: 300-PL1 2147559 1 Repairable DR27 300PL1 1

ELEVATOR &
COMPRESSION
BOARD

M IGNATOR
. . . FAST FUSE 2146116 1 F1 1

6X32 0.32A 250V
ULL
. . . FAST FUSE 2146116-3 1 F2 1

6X32 3A 250V ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 9918379 1 F3 1

FUSE 6X32 10A
250V ULL
. . PCB: 300-PL3 2111927 1 300PL3 1

COUNTER BOARD

LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183931 1 F1 1

FUSE 6X32 3.2 A
250V ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 46- 1 F2 1 NOTE: See

FUSE 5X20 3,15A 267217P2 TSG
250V ULL 1 chapter112 ;
comment
about the size
of F2.
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183936 1 F3 1

FUSE 6X32 1A
250V ULL
. . . SLOW BLOW 99183928 1 F4 1

FUSE 6X32 2A
250V ULL
. . CAPACITOR 2107810 1 300C1 1 Capacitor of

4700µF/400v (300- the DC BUS
C1)
. . SET OF CABLES 2147524 2 1

W1, W2 & W3
. . SET OF CABLES 2147523 2 1

W4 & W6
. . SET OF CABLES 2147522 2 1

W8 W9 W10 & W19

M IGNATOR
. . W11 CABLE 2147546 2 W11 1

FROM 300-PL11
TO 300-PL8 AND
TANK
. . W16 CABLE 2147542 2 W16 1

FROM 300-PL9 TO
300-PL14
. . W21 CABLE 2147538 2 W21 1

FROM 300-PL8 TO
300-PL15
. 200 COLUMN 2116102 2 1

UNIT
. . 200-M1 ELEVA- 2175867 1 DR06 200M1 1 Previous part

TOR GEARED number was
MOTOR ASSEM- 2137106
BLY
. . MICROSWITCH 2135971 1 200S1/ 3

1RT 8A 46V F6 x 200S2/
0.8 (200-S1/200- 200S3
S2/200-S3)
. . SUSPENSION 2135086 2 1
BELTS ASSEMBLY
. . ELEVATOR 2116126 2 DR07 1

DRIVE MOTOR
BELT
. . W204: WIRED 2124284 1 DR10 200S1/ 2

EMERGENCY 200S2/
BUTTON (200-S1/ W204
200-S2)
. . W216: WIRED 2124352 1 DR08 200R1/ 1 800

ANGULAR POTEN- W216 T
TIOMETER (200-
R1)
. . BRAKE AND 2175314 1 DR09 200Y2 1 FRU

ROTATION BOX CHANGE
ASSEMBLY (200- POLICY:
Y2) Because the
replacement
of the brake in
the field is
dangerous for
people

M IGNATOR
. . ROLLER 2146719 2 4
12X55X16 2R
. . ROLLER 2146791 2 2
13X30X8 1R
. . BALL BEARING 99037684 2 1

20X42X12 1R
. . LOCKING ROD 2116651 2 1
. . PIN 2153971 1 6
. . ANGULATION 2139536 2 1
SILKSCREEN
PRINTING
. . ANGULATION 2116118 2 1
GEARWHEEL
ASSEMBLY
. . BALL-LATCH 91508844 1 1
. . W111 ELEVA- 2124270 2

TOR (Hight end of
travel switch)
CABLE
. . W112 ELEVA- 2124271 2

TOR( low end of
travel switch)
CABLE
. . W113 ELEVA- 2124322 2

TOR SECURITY
CABLE
. 200 EXAMINA- 2147433 / N 1

TION ARM 2140057
. . W200: 200-M2 2135281 1 DR18 200M2/ 1 This stepper

COMPRESSION W200 motor is the
MOTOR ASSEM- same for the
BLY DMR. 34
WATTS 2.75
amp.But the
part number is
different.

M IGNATOR
. . W217: THICK- 2135290 1 DR20 200R2/ 1 800

NESS POTENTI- W217 T
OMETER
ASSEMBLY (200-
R2)
. . PCB: 200-PL7 2111935-2 1 DR21 200PL7 1

COMPRESSION
SENSOR BOARD
. . COMPRESSION 2132430 1 DR19 1

MAIN BELT
. . FLAT CABLE 2138366 1 1

ASSEMBLY
. . ENCODER 2137917 1 1
KNOB ASSEMBLY
. . ENCODER 2135377 1 DR22 1

WHEEL ASSEM-
BLY
. . PCB: 200-PL8 45554409 1 DR22 200PL8 1

ENCODER BOARD
. . PCB: 200-PL6 2119388 1 DR23 200PL6 1 800

MAGNIFICATION T
BOARD
. . BALL BEARINGS 91280699 2 2

6X19X6 1R
. . BALL-LATCH 91513131 1 1
. . MAGNET 2147039 1
ASSEMBLY
. 200 TUBE HOUS- . N 1

ING SPACER
. . PCB: 200-PL1 2111929 1 200PL1 1

ARM_1 DISTRIBU-
TION BOARD
. . PCB: 200-PL9 2120924-2 1 DR27 200PL9 1 800

ARM_2 DISTRIBU- T
TION BOARD
. . PCB: 200-PL2 2111933 1 DR16 200PL2 4

COLLIMATOR
DETECTION
BOARD

M IGNATOR
. . W215: WIRED 2156847 1 200M3/ 1 800 Related previ-

FILTER MOTOR W215 T ous part num-
(200-M3) ber was
EQUIPPED WITH 2132871
PLATE
. . FILTER WHEEL 45560092 1 DR12 1 800

T
. . FILTER WHEEL 91307501 1 1 800

CLIP T
. . W214: 200-B1 2132870 1 200B1/ 1 800

WIRED FILTER W214 T
POSITION CELL
. . FILTER ASSEM- 2147504 1 1 700

BLY ( Mo) T
. . MIRROR 2142669 1 DR15 1

ASSEMBLY
. . HALOGEN LAMP 2143585 1 DR14 200L1 1

12V 100W (200-L1)
. . WIRED LAMP 2124274 1 1

SOCKET
. . FRAME COLLI- 2142668 1 1

MATOR HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
. . W203: WIRED 2124276 1 200Y1 1

TUBE COOLING
FAN (200-Y1)
. 200 IMAGE N 1
RECEPTOR
. . PHOTOMULTI- 2143053 1 DR31 1 Pevious part

PLIER CELL number was
ASSEMBLY (PM 2132860.
TUBE) The new num-
ber is certified
CDRH.
. . . KIT PHOTO- 2143783 1 DR31 1

MULTIPLIER
. . PCB: 200-PL3 2133171 1 200PL3 1

BUCKY COM-
MAND BOARD

M IGNATOR
. . PCB: 200-PL5 2111931-3 1 DR32 200PL5 1

HTPM BOARD
. . WIRED LED 2136642 1 DR29 200H1 1

PANEL MOUNT
INDICATOR
. . BUTTON 2132147 2 2
. . BALL LATCH 91389008 2 1
. . BALL RACE 2114803 1 1
. . IMAGE RECEP- 2111736 2

TOR CASTING
. . W226 CABLE 2124360 2

FROM 200PL3 TO
200PL10
. READOUT UNIT 2138068 1 1 800

T
. . PCB: 200-PL4 2127947-2 1 200PL4 1 800

DISPLAY BOARD T
. HANDLE ASSEM- 2130315 1 DR26 2

BLY
. 100 CONTROL 2107636 1 Repair- CONSOLE 1 NOTE: The

PANEL CDRH able CDRH console of
(CONSOLE) 700T/800T is
the same than
the DMR con-
sole.
. . 100-PL1 OPERA- 2122763 1 100PL1 1

TOR BOARD ( NO
DISPLAY)
. . 2-LINES FLUO- 91717079 1 1

RESCENT DIS-
PLAY MODULE
. . 1-LINE FLUO- 2102661 1 1

RESCENT DIS-
PLAY MODULE
. . 100-PL2 CON- 2106486 1 Repairable 100PL2 1

SOLE CONTROL
BOARD
. . CONTROL 2140215 2 1
PANEL CABLE

M IGNATOR
. . CONSOLE 2143061 1 1
COVER ASSEM-
BLY
. . BUTTON 45474409 2 2
. . PUSH BUTTON 2144969 1 This kit

KIT includes two
pushbuttons
(first trigger
second trig-
ger).
These buttons
are to be
implemented
. COVERS N 1
. . LEFT COVER, 2145228 1 DR11 1

TUBE HOUSING
SPACER
. . RIGHT COVER, 2145227 1 DR11 1

TUBE HOUSING
SPACER
. . LEFT COVER, 2120610 1 DR17 1

EXAMINATION
ARM
. . RIGHT COVER, 2120609 1 DR17 1

EXAMINATION
ARM
. . FRONT COVER, 2150119/ 1 DR17 1

EXAMINATION 2150120
ARM
. . LEFT LATERAL 2116658 2 DR05 1

COVER, COLUMN
. . RIGHT LATERAL 2116657 2 DR05 1

COVER, COLUMN
. . FRONT COVER, 2116655 2 DR05 1

COLUMN
. . FRONT BOT- 2116654 2 DR05 1

TOM COVER, COL-
UMN
. . TOP COVER, 2116656 2 DR05 1

COLUMN

M IGNATOR
. . LAMP ACCESS 2145229 1 1

COVER
. . BACK COVER, 2117738 1 1

IMAGE RECEP-
TOR
. . TOP COVER, 2113437 1 1

IMAGE RECEP-
TOR
. . REAR COVER, 2115793 2 DR01 1

ELECTRONIC
CABINET
. . FRONT COVER, 2115792 2 DR01 1

ELECTRONIC
CABINET
. . TOP COVER, 2115794 1 DR01 1

ELECTRONIC
CABINET
. . TOP COVER 2179341 DR01

ELECTRONIC
CABINET
EQUIPPED
. . RAPID LOCK 2147088 2

(mod R6652 AC-
ZN)
. CONDUIT CABLE 2124272 2 DR25 1
. . GASKET C133902 1 1
. ACCESSORIES . N
. . 18X24 BUCKY 2142957 1 Repairable 1

CDRH
. . . 18X24 GRID 2113936 1 DR24 1
. . CASSETTE 2143054 1 1 Beginning 97,

HOLDER 18X24 a new cas-
sette holder
without cover
is available.
part number:
2174361
See TSG 8

M IGNATOR
. . 18X24 2147091 1 1
INJECTED COM-
PRESSION PAD-
DLE
. . SQUARE SPOT 45475446 1 1

INJECTED COM-
PRESSION PAD-
DLE
. . MAGNIFICA- 2142952 2 1
TION STAND
CDRH
. . . MAGNET 91671876 This magnet is

D4x20 inserted in the
left pin of the
mag plate.
. . SHOULDER 2121396 1 1
GUARD
. . . SHOULDER 2168756 This kit

GUARD FIXATION includes the
KIT fixation to hold
the shoulder
guard
(attached to
the cover) See
SM rev 2.
. . MISC.
. . . 18X24 LARGE 2142674 2 1

FOCUS BLADE
. . . 18X24 SMALL 2142673 2 1

FOCUS BLADE
. . . SQUARE SPOT 2142677 2 1

LARGE FOCUS
CONTACT BLADE
. . . SQUARE SPOT 2142681 2 1

SMALL FOCUS 1st
MAG FACTOR
BLADE
. . . SQUARE SPOT 2142682 2 1

SMALL FOCUS 2nd
MAG FACTOR
BLADE

M IGNATOR
. . COMP/DECOMP 2122198 1 1
FOOTSWITCHES
EMC
. . MANUAL FILM 2162958 1 1 Previous part

MARKING DEVICE number;
2103708
. . MAINS SUPPLY 2140154 2 1

CABLE
. . SERVICE TER- 2147528 1 MAINT 1 2147528

MINAL CABLE replaces
EMC (LAPTOP 45560632
CONNECTION
CABLE)
. TECHNICAL N
PUBLICATION,
SENOGRAPHE
"700T & 800T"
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL 101/
(FRENCH) 2135575-
101
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL 100/
(ENGLISH) 2135575-
100
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL (SPAN- 106/
ISH) 2135575-
106
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL (GER- 108/
MAN) 2135575-
108
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL (ITALIAN) 111/
2135575-
111
. . OPERATOR 2135572- 2 DOC 1

MANUAL (PORTU- 127/
GUESE) 2135575-
127

M IGNATOR
. . SERVICE MAN- 2146692- 2 DOC 1

UAL (ENGLISH) 100
. . SCHEMATICS 2148335- 2 DOC 1 The Shemat-

100 ics are in REV
2 from Janu-
ary 1997.
In rev 2, there
is the new
300PL9.
. . PIM 2148333- 2 DOC 1 This is the

100 Pre-Installa-
tion manual for
seno in a room
.
There is
another PIM
for mobile
seno.
. . PIM TRUCK- 2153233- DOC This document

ABLE 100 is at the rev 3
from February
97
. OPTIONAL N
ACCESSORIES
. . PROTECTIVE 2146367 1 DR28 1

GLASS (RAD
SHIELD)
. . LONG CON- 2150064 1 1

TROL PANEL
CABLE (10 M)
. . CONTROL 2122186 1 1
PANEL HOLDER &
LONG CABLE (10
M)
. . SET OF 18X24 2122187 2 1

COLLIMATOR
BLADES: LF & SF
(for UK)
. . SET OF 24X30 2153295 2 1

COLLIMATOR
BLADES: LF & SF

M IGNATOR
. . SMALL ROUND 2102380 1 1

SPOT COMPRES-
SION PADDLE
. . . PLASTIC PART 45440901 1 1

FOR SMALL
ROUND SPOT
COMP. PADDLE
. . SET OF SMALL 2122196 2 1 LF CONTACT,

ROUND COLLIMA- SF 1st & 2 nd
TOR BLADES FACTOR
. . 18X24 AXIL- 45559489 1 1

LARY COMPRES-
SION PADDLE
. . . PLASTIC PART C808649 1 1

FOR AXILLARY
COMPRESSION
PADDLE
. . 2D CROSSHAIR 2122197 N 1
WITH BIOPSY
PADDLE
. . ADDITIONAL 2103712 2 1
SET OF 14 FILM
MARKERS DEVICE
(ENGLISH)
. . SET of SMALL 2165531

ROUND COLL
BLADE: LF CON-
TACT SF 1st & nd
Factor
. . MOBIL VAN 2122201 2 TRUCK KIT 1

INSTALLATION KIT
. . BUCKY 24 X 30 2142977
CDRH
. . . GRID 24 X 30 2113937
. . 24 X 30 2147092 This paddle is

INJECTED COM- not exactly the
RESSION PADDLE same than the
paddle for
DMR
45475447.

M IGNATOR
. . BASIC XRAY 2122185

PROTECTIVE
SHIELD (GLASS +
FRAME)
. . SHIELD FIXING 2168368 2 Kit of hard-

KIT (HARDWARE) ware in the
case of lost.
. X-RAY TUBE 2133635 1 DR13 1

ASSEMBLY MAX-
IRAY 70 TH-M
. . THERMOSTATS 2105128 1 1
+ HARNESS
. . INSULATING 2105127 1 2
PLATE
. TOOL N
. . HEATER CUR- 36003399 1 No-Rep 1 P/S

RENT & BIAS
TOOL
. . RESOLUTION 36003565 1 No-Rep 1 P/S

PATTERN
HOLDER
. . HOLDER STAR 2149718 1

PATTERN FOCUS
0.1 FOR SENO
700T & 800T
. . HOLDER STAR 2149719 1

PATTERN FOCUS
0.3 FOR SENO
700T & 800T
. . DIA- 2150115 1
PHRAM(SHUT-
TER) FOR
SENOGRAPHE
700T & 800T
. . SENSOR TYPE 46- 1 tool (Mammo

GAMMEX RMI 194427P4 Compression
MODEL 817 (com- 07 Scale)
pression scale)
. . HEATER CUR- 36003399 1 This is the

RENT & BIAS same tool for
TOOL DMR.

M IGNATOR
. . MAMMOCOM 2157897 Software diskette/ This software

V1-16 floppy is needed to
run the main-
tenance tests
of the CPU.
. IDENTIFICATION 2147620 / 2 1
KIT 2146900
. EMERGENCY 2143982 2 1
MAINTENANCE
KIT
. GENERIC EDM GENERIC There are 6

(mostly applicable EDM parts related
for the USA only) to GENERIC
EDM .
. . Generic EDM kit 2149855 GENERIC

EDM
. . Multi-room 2155518-3 GENERIC

Adapter Kit EDM
(includes one 100 ft
RS-4223 cable)
. . Multi-room 2155518-4 GENERIC

adapter kit (includes EDM
one200 ft RS-422
cable)
. . Multi-Room 2155518-5 GENERIC

Adapter Kit EDM
(includes one 300 ft
Rs-422 cable)
. . Generic EDM 2166840- GENERIC

pre-installation 100 EDM
Direction (docu-
mentation)
. . 4-line telephone 46- GENERIC

line multiplexer box 328475p1 EDM
. . 8-line telephone 46-

line multiplexer box 328475p2
. . Insite connectivity 2160938

test kit

M IGNATOR
. . Multi-room 2157099
adapter kit (includes
one 50 ft rs422
cable)
. SENOGRAPHE 2143981 2 1
INSTALLATION
KIT
. ANTI-SIESMIC 2149142 2 KIT 1

INSTALLATION
KIT FOR SENO.

Theory of Operation
CHAPTER 6 THEORY OF OPERATION
1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes the following three mains sections:
• Description of Mammocom Software that is used for senographe maintenance,
• LED Charts of electronics boards of Senographe 700T/800T,
• Theory of Operation of Senographe 700T/800T.
- See Table of Contents on page 3 for detailed contents.
2 MAMMOCOM SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION

2-1 Menu Access
Para # TITLE DESCRIPTION
1 STATS MENU - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM
ACCESS Terminal software running,
select SETUP/MAINT/STAT from Application mode.
- see below for STATISTICS MENU STRUCTURE.
1-1 STATS Menu Tree - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM
Structure Terminal software running,
select SETUP/MAINT/STAT/STATS from Application mode.
2 PROD TREE MENU - Not used for maintenance purpose.

ACCESS
3 MAINT TREE - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM
MENU ACCESS Terminal software running, select SETUP/MAINT/MAINT from Application
mode.
- This menu allows access to the following sub menus:
GENE:
MAINTENANCE MENU 1 see section 3-1
MAINTENANCE MENU 2 see section 3-2
ARM
MAINTENANCE MENU ARM 1 see section 3-3
MAINTENANCE MENU ARM 2 see section 3-4
CODE see section 3-5
TRANS see section 3-5
Operation.fm Page no. 183 Chapter 6

Theory of Operation
3-1 MAINTENANCE - With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM
MENU 1: Rotor Terminal software running,
Heat Bias HV mA- select SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/GENE from Application mode.
meas 1>2
MENU 2: Synchro Terminal software running,
PM INTG 2>1 select SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/GENE/1-->2 from Application mode.
ARM 1: Light Elev Terminal software running,
Comp Rot Filter 1>2 select SETUP/MAINT/MAINT/ARM from Application mode.
ARM 2: Collim Mag Terminal software running,
Sensor Displ 1>2 select F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/ARM/1-->2 from Application mode.
3-5 INSTALL PARAM 1) INSTALL PARAM TRANSFER:

TRANFER (save & With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM
load) & ERROR Terminal software running, select F10/F9//MAINT/MAINT/TRANS from Appli-
CODE (vizualisa- cation mode to access INSTALLATION PARAMETERS MAINT MENU.
tion and copy)
2) ERROR CODES: VISUALIOZATION & SAVE:
With Field Service Laptop connected to the Senographe and MAMMOCOM

Terminal software running,
F10/F9/MAINT/MAINT/CODES from Application mode to access ERROR
CODES MAINT MENU.
Chapter 6 Page no. 184 Operation.fm

Theory of Operation
2-2 Purpose of Mammocom software
1 PURPOSE OF - The MAMMO COM Communication Software provides the connection

SOFTWARE from the Senographes 700T & 800T toa PC (laptop) to access GEMS-pro-
prietary maintenance tests.
- The software is composed of several operating modules:
. ANSI-compatible VT200 terminal emulator (restricted).

. On-line Help on the various Senographe menus.
. File transfer modules between the Senographe and the PC.
Note: The terminal emulator menu can be used on 700T & 800T (set transmis-
sion speed to 9600bauds),
also on the DMR (set transmission speed to 9600bauds)
and the SENIX (set transmission speed to 1200 bauds).
* Any 8088, 8086, 80286 or 80386 microprocessor-based computer operating

under MS-DOS (Version 2.1 or higher).
2-3 General User Interface
2 GENERAL USER - The various software functions are accessed via standard menus. The
INTERFACE screen menus, therefore, are all similar. Only the function screens differ
depending of the function to be made.
2-1 Menu Screen Struc- - The screen is composed of three fields:

ture
. Screen title (for Main menus only).
. Selection box.
. Promp messages.
Note: TAV = Service Terminal (French: Terminal Apres-Vente).
- The Selection Box displays the accessible submenus. The Up/Down cursor
keys are used to scan different
options that are displayed one after the other in video reverse.
. To select an option, hit <Enter>.

. To return to the previous menu, hit <Alt><M>.
. To exit the MAMMO COM program (from the Main Menu), hit <CTRL><E>.
- For most of the menus, hit <Alt><H> to get a current screen Help, describing
the various options offered.
- The use of each function key is given on the message line at the foot of the
screen.

Theory of Operation
2-2 Line Editor - Several screens require entering a character chain for a number (See 7,
HELP MENUS), file name, or subdirectory name. A common line editor is
required for this.
- This editor displays a box containing a title (the name of the parameter to be
modified) and a value (default or previously selected) of the parameter being
considered.
- Data entry is always made in Insertion Mode, i.e., each character entered
takes the place of the character
previously located at the cursor.
- The acknowledged function keys are:
. BACKSPACE: deletes the character located immediately to the left.
. RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW: moves the cursor.
. ENTER: returns to previous menu by confirming the character chain entered.
. ALT-M: returns to previous menu by restoring the character chain found at

the start.
2-4 Tree Structure of available Functions
3 TREE STRUC- Note: Shaded functions are those functions that start operating immediately
TURE OF AVAIL- when selected.
ABLE FUNCTIONS
2-5 Terminal Emulation description
4 TERMINAL EMU- - This option is used to emulate an ANSI ASCII terminal, VT200. The
LATION Senographes 700T & 800T have a serial connection to which this type of ter-
minal can be detected to simulate the console and access the
Maintenance Menus.
4-1 Accessing the - From the Main menu, select: Terminal Emulator.
Function . The terminal function starts immediately following selection, and the Main
Menu screen is replaced by the Terminal screen (see below).

Theory of Operation
4-2 User Interface - Once the function is entered, the connection is initialized with the communi-
cations parameters by default or selected in the Change Com. Parameters
menu.
. At the first entry, the Terminal screen is erased and the TERMINAL EMULA-
TOR message appears.
. The cursor appears in the top left hand corner of the screen.
. A VT200 terminal displays 24 lines of 80 characters. The PC has a screen of
25 lines. Line 25 displays a prompt message for the main access functions to
the Senographe:
. F10: This key is used to connect the Senographes 700T, 800T, DMR and
600T SENIX HF (the communications parameters shoud be modified for the
latter).
Note: Connection to the Senographe can be made via this software only, as
no other terminal emulator is recognized by the Senographe.
. CTRL-D: Used to disconnect the Senographe unit.
. ALT-M: Used to return to the Main Menu of the MAMMO COM software with-
out breaking the connection. This means that a later selection of the terminal
emulator returns to the screen displayed before ALT-M was hit, and dialog with
the Senographe can take up where it left off. This function is necessary to
return to the Help Menus or to transfer files.
. The seven PC keys, F1 thru F6 and F9, simulate the seven keys surrounding
the Senographe console readouts and give access to all the menus (Medical,
Installation, and Maintenance).
4-3 Connections Hard- - Connections Hardware:

ware & Communica-
tion Protocol . The PC/Senographe connection is made via an RS232 serial connection sup-
ported by a DB9 connector installed on the Generator Interface Board located
in the Generator Cabinet.
- Communication Protocol:
. This is a character protocol that involves the transmission of ASCII charac-

ters in full duplex with data flow control (XON/XOFF Protocol).
. The default parameters are:

. 9600 bauds,
. Seven bit,
. Even parity,
. One stop bit.
. These parameters correspond to the connection with the Senographes 700T,

800T and DMR, but they can be modified for the connection with another
machine (e.g.: 1200 bauds for SENIX HF).

Theory of Operation
4-4 Emulator Restric- - This software is created specially to be used with the Senographes 700T,
tions 800T, DMR & SENIX HF. Therefore, this software emulates only those func-
tions required for such use. The result is a compromise between the speed of
the reply (loading and runtime) and the level of compatibility required.
- The only function keys recognized are:
. Function keys used by the Senographe,

. Cursor keys,
. Four keys: Insertion, Backspace, Prev Screen, and Next Screen.
- The emulator does not recognize display commands in large characters,

semi-graphic, or underlined (due to the CGA LCD boards of the PC).
- Most of the cursor-positionning commands as well as publishing commands

are available. The scrolling area is programmable. The cursor position and the
usual character attributes can be stored and restored.
- This software's performance is closer to a terminal than the standard

ANSI.SYS file.
2-6 Communication Parameters description
5 COMMUNICATION - This menu is used to modify the communication parameters of the serial con-
PARAMETERS nection between the PC and the Senographe. The new values can be backed
up in order to find them by default in future uses of the MAMMO COM Soft-
ware.
5-1 Accessing the Menu - From the Main Menu, select: Change Com. Parameters:
. The software displays the main parameter screen.

Theory of Operation
5-2 Modifying the - BAUD RATE Menu This menu offers the following transmission mode
Parameters speeds: 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600,300,150, and 110. To change the baud
rate, select the desired rate and <ENTER>.
If no change is required, hit <ALT><M> to return to the Main Menu.
FOR 700T/800T the rate is 9600 bauds
- COM_PORT MENU: From version V1-16 of mammocom it is possible to

select port 1 or port 2. This function is may be needed to use the mouse for the
ASM doc and the dialogue with the Senographe .
- Parity Menu: This menu offers the following parity bits: Even, Odd, None.
FOR 700T/800T select Even
- Length menu: This menu is used to select the number of data bits per charac-
ter.
Either seven or eight data bits are selected. FOR 700T/800T select 07
- Stop Bit Menu: This menu is used to select the number of stop bits at the end
of a character. The selection is made between one and two bits. FOR 700T/
800T select 01
- Save Function:
. This option is used to save the communications parameters selected in order
to find them as default values in future use of the MAMMO COM Software. The
save is made by default when the option is selected. The file created is:
STAV.DAT.
2-7 File Transmission
6 FILE TRANSMIS- - This menu is used to transfer Senographe files to the PC, and vice-versa.
SION Two types of file are concerned:
. Text files in any format.

. Encoded files with the Motorola Exormacs protocol.

Theory of Operation
6-1 Preparing the The system must be in emulation to make a file transfer. The file transfer runs
Transfer as follows:
1) To link up with the Senographe, start MAMMOCOM from the icon in win-
dows. (The executable file is: STAV
select the Terminal Emulator and connect to the Senographe by pressing F10.
2) Run the menu tree structure on the Senographe until the Transfer Menu is
reached. The possibilities are as follows:
. Install param save @< >
. Install param load @ < >
. Error code transfer: @< >
. Statistic transfer: @< >
Where @<xxxx> is the Maintenance Screen number, refer to the tree struc-
tures in 7.
3) In emulation, line Nr. 25 gives the following commands:
CTRL-D: Disconnect F10: Connect ALT-M: Main Menu
4) Hit <ALT><M> to access the Main Menu without disconnecting from the
Senographe.
5) Select: File Transmission: This selection displays the File Transmission
Menu in which PARAM is the file name by default if no other default name was
saved beforehand (see below).
6-2 Type of Files Trans- - Two main types of file are concerned by file transfer between PC and
ferred Senographe:
. Coded files.
. ASCII files.
a) Coded Files:
. These are binary files that observe the Motorola Exormacs format. Coded
files are used to transfer the Senographe calibration variables for back-up on
floppy disk. The protocol selected ensures that the data transmitted are cor-
rect.
. A special menu is used to check the file transmitted by the Senographe. If the
transfer has run without error detection, it is certain that the file transferred can
be reload on the Senographe.
. The software determines the end of the transmission when it receives a spe-
cial frame described in the protocol.
. In the PC-to-Senographe transfer, the file type is not processed by the MAM-
MOCOM software. All the characters of the file are transmitted.
b) ASCII Files:
. The ASCII files do not observe any format. The end of transmission is
detected by reception of CTRL_Z. Statistics and error codes are transmitted
according to this format.

Theory of Operation
6-3 File Name, Direc- a) FILE NAME Option:

tory & Suffix - Selecting this option call the line editor to enter the file name. The access
Options path and the extension are defined in the following menu (Directory and Suf-
fix).
. To return to the File Transmission Main Menu without changing the name by
default, hit <ALT><M>
. To return to the File Transmission Main Menu and select the new name dis-
played by the line editor, press <ENTER>.
b) DIRECTORY and SUFFIX Options:

- These options are used to access the menu where the tree structure and
extensions of the files are encoded. When selected, the following menu
appears:
. The Directory option of this menu is used to find the access path for the file
name.
. The Suffix option refers to the file name extension.
. The Save option is used to save the data structures for the two options above
in order to find them as default values when the MAMMO COM Software is
used in a future operation.
6-4 Transmit & Receive a) TRANSMIT Option:

Options - This option is selected to inform the Senographe that you wish to make a PC-
to-Senographe transfer of the file name previously selected. This option runs
in two phases:
1) Automatic execution of the default transfer validation command: CTRL O +

F1
2) Transfer.
b) RECEIVE Option:
- This option is selected to inform the Senographe that you wish to receive a
file (i.e., a Senographe-to-PC file transfer). The file may concern:
. ASCII file.
. Coded file.
- The selection of this option calls another menu giving the choice of file types
to be transferred. Selecting one of other of these options causes:
. Automatic execution of the default transfer validation command: CTRL O +

F1
. The actual transfer.

Theory of Operation
6-5 Display Window in - When either TRANSMIT or RECEIVE is selected, a display window of char-
Transfer acters transmitted appears in order to make a visual check of the transmission.
Various messages are displayed:
. Reception succesful
. File not found
. Reception error
. Transmission error
2-8 Help Menus
7 HELP MENUS - The Help Control Module is the part of the MAMMO COM Software used to
control the Help Files on the various (screen) Numbers of the menu tree-struc-
ture in the Senographe software. Each screen transmitted by the Senographe
to the Service Terminal is identified by its own number (Number) in the follow-
ing format:
@<XXXXX>>
The Number represented by XXXXX is any number, 0 thru 99999.
- There are two methods of accessing the Help File:
. Help Context or Help relative to the current Number and under emulation.
. Global Help or Help for any Number.
7-1 Help Context - Help Context is used for the current Number and in emulation. Help Context
is managed by the On-line Help module. There are two situations:
. You are in emulation, so you receive Help for the current Number.
. You receive Help for the ? Number.
7-1-1 Accessing the Mod- - To access the On-line Help module in all situations, go to the Main Menu and
ule select Help Context .
- Once the Help Context selection has been made, the software searches for
the corresponding ASCII File Help, either at a Number or at the current Num-
ber, and displays the corresponding screen (see below).

Theory of Operation
7-1-2 Using the Help - The Help window displays the Text File for the current Number in emulation,
or at ? Number without emulation.
. The list of commands includes use of the keys:
. ALT-H to get Help on the use of the keys.

. Up/Down/Left/Right arrows to display the hidden parts of the text on the
screen.
. Next Page and Previous Page.
. ESC to exit the Help display.
. TAB, and SHIFT + TAB.
. In the window, the lines starting with the @<XXXXX> sequence are lines writ-
ten by the Help writer. These lines tell the software which Numbers can be
accessed from the current display. The software identifies these Numbers as
follows:
. TAB & SHIFT keys are used to select before or after the Number. The selec-
tion is displayed by putting the @<XXXXX> sequence corresponding to the
Number into video reverse.
. Each time the ENTER key is hit (when the cursor is found on a pre-selected
field by the TAB or SHIFT-TAB keys) and starting with @, the software reads
the seven following characters in order to identify the Number (placed between
the two characters < and >). The corresponding Help File is displayed in place
of the previous file.
7-2 Global Help - As with Help Context, Global Help is used to display the Help Files, on any
Number, and in emulation or not.
7-2-1 Accessing the Mod- - From the Main menu, select: Global Help.
ule
7-2-2 Choice of Number - The standard line editor is used to enter the selected Number. The software
displays the following screen.
? (zero) is the default Number in this Number selection window. The Service
Engineer has two methods of selecting the Number required:
. Hit <ENTER> to select the ? Number.
. Via the keyboard:
. Enter the Number.
. Hit <ENTER> to validate.
- In both the above cases, the Help is displayed immediately ENTER is hit. The
use is the same as for Help Context. Hit <ALT><M> to return to the Main
menu.

Theory of Operation
7-3 Structure and Cre-

ation of Help Files - see below.
7-3-1 Help Files Structure - All Help Files are contained in a chained tree structure in the HELP directory
that is in turn chained in the STAV User Directory. See example.
- Access to the Help Files is made by a Help System Directory File, which
should be contained in the same directory as STAV.EXE file. The STAV.HLP
File has the following structure:
a) Each line of the file corresponds to a Number for which you want to have
On-line Help. Where a Number does not appear in this file, the Help program
sends an error message, “No Help available".
b) Each line is defined according to the structure:
XXXXX I \gene\ HLPXXXXX.dat I Comments
Where:
. XXXXX is the Number.
. HLPXXXXX.dat is the name of the Help File corresponding to the Number.

The name can take any form, but with a maximum of eight characters.
. Comments field can take any form.
. \gene\ is the access path to the Help File for the Help Directory.
7-3-2 Creating Help Files - The Help Files are ASCII Files of any format and length.
- Chaining to other Help Files is made by character sequences recognized by

STAV.
- Help Files are composed of:
@<XXXXX>
Where XXXXX is the Number whose Help is to be displayed. @< is the detec-
tion sequence of this Number, and should not therefore appear anywhere else
in the File.
- The complete chaining to the Main Menu and the Submenus is left to the
Help writer, and can be made anywhere within the text. Example: the X cali-
bration requires entering the Y parameter from the @<00456> Menu.
- The tree-structure of the Senographe software is therefore not mandatory in

the Help Files.

Theory of Operation
7-4 Procedure for Cre- 1. Create the required Help File.

ating or Modifying 2. Insert the Help File in a suitable but arbitrary directory, and chain it under
the Help Help.
3. Create or modify the corresponding line in the STAV.HLP File.
4. The install.exe program recopies the complete tree-stucture and all the files
of one disk to another disk.
2-9 Saving the Emulator Screen into a file
8 SAVING THE EMU- - The menu is used to save the emulator screen of the terminal on an ASCII
LATOR SCREEN File. The video attributes are lost because they cannot be used on an ASCII
ON A FILE File which must be compatible with any line editor or display software.
8-1 Accessing the Menu - From the Main Menu of the MAMMO COM Software, select: Save Emulator
Screen:
. The Save menu is displayed (see below).
8-2 File Name Option - This option is used to modify the name of the backup file. The standard line-
orientated editor is used.
8-3 Directory and Suffix - These options are used to access a menu that selects File Directory and
Options Extensions.
Directory: Find the access path for the file name.
Suffix: File name extension.
Save: Saves the data structures for the two options above in order to find them
as default values in future operations of the MAMMO COM Software.
8-4 Save Screen Func- - When the file name is selected, this function saves the screen. There are
tion three possibilities:
a) Terminal Emulator Option not Selected Beforehand:
. No save to make as the screen does not exist.
b) File Selected to Save Screen does not Exist
. The MAMMO COM Software creates the file and saves the screen: the
“Screen saved in file:..." message appears.
c) Selected File Exists:
. The MAMMO COM Software adds the new screen at the end of this file: the
“Screen appended to file:..." message appears.

Theory of Operation
2-10 Access to DOS
9 ACCESS TO DOS - This function is used to access the MS-DOS without exiting from the
MAMMO COM Software.
- The PC can remain connected to the Senographe, and all MAMMO COM
Software operating parameters are preserved. An advantage in running the
MAMMO COM Software from a floppy diskette is that this DOS accessing pro-
cedure is much faster than exiting STAV and restarting it.
- From the STAV Main menu, select: DOS Shell:
. DOS is accessed immediately.
. The program displays the “Type Exit to return to Terminal Emulator". The Exit
command is a standard command of MS-DOS and recognized by the COM-
MAND.COM interpreter. Once it is used, the STAV Main menu reappears and
the session can resume.
CAUTION:
- If the MAMMO COM Software is run from a floppy disk, the MAMMO COM
should not contain an MS-DOS version that is incompatible with the PC. If the
STAV finds a system on the current disk drive, it will use it in preference to the
usual system of the PC.
For simplicity, use a MAMMO COM floppy disk without any system.
2-11 Clearing the Emulator
A CLEARING THE - This option is used to clear the emulator screen of the terminal.
EMULATOR - From the STAV Main Menu, select: Clear Emulator Screen.
SCREEN . Once the option is selected, the emulator screen is cleared if the emulator
was used beforehand. Otherwise, this option has no effect.
2-12 Saving parameters
B SAVING PARAME- SAVING THE EMULATOR SCREEN ON A FILE- The following can be modi-
TERS fied: communications parameters with the Senographe, Directory, and default
suffix of the files to be transferred.
- When the current value of one of the parameters is modified, the Save option
generates the STAV.DAT File in the Current Directory.
- At each subsequent use of the MAMMO COM Software, the values con-
tained in the file are taken by default.
- If this file contains both the communications parameters and the names of
the sub-directories and the suffixes by default, the Save options from the fol-
lowing menus have the same effect: Change Com. Parameters Menu, Save
Emulator Screen Menu (Path Selection Menu or File Extension Menu), and
File Transmission Menu.

Theory of Operation
2-13 Mammocom floppy disk contents
C “MAMMO COM" CAUTION:

FLOPPY DISK The content of the MAMMO COM floppy disk is classified as PROPRIETARY.
CONTENTS The disk may be duplicated for the purpose of a backup using the Disk Copy
command of MS-DOS, or installed on the hard disk (INSTALL). The MAMMO
COM Software is protected against breach of the copyright law.
- Floppy Disk Contents:
STAV.EXE: MAMMO COM Software: Terminal Emulator for Senographes

700T/800T/DMR/SENIX HF.
INSTALL.EXE: Installation software: Copy this floppy disk on a hard drive or
another floppy disk:
. Select drive and directory to access INSTALL.
. Enter INSTALL <CR> command.
. Give target drive and directory where you want to install MAMMO COM.
DISPF.EXE : Display File: Interactive file displaying software.
STAV.HLP: Help system directory file. This file is necessary to run Global Help
or Context Help.
HELP.DIR: Help system main directory.
Optional:
STAV.DAT: User defined, default communication parameters, file directory
and extension (for file transmission utilities).
Do not try to display this file as it is a binary file.
2-14 Installation of Mammocom on hard disk
D INSTALLATION ON - Proceed as follows:

HARD DISK
1. Switch on PC.
2. Boot the PC.
3. Insert MAMMO COM floppy disk.
4. Enter A: and hit <ENTER>.
5. Accept or change the Installation Directory displayed (default is C:\STAV).

. INSTALL copies the files and automatically creates the required sub-directo-
ries.

Theory of Operation
1 Preliminaries SUPPLIES:
- Formatted diskette.
TOOLS:
- Laptop with Mammocom (Senographe communication software Part number:
2157987 version V1-16)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
- No specific precautions are applicable.
2-15 Using Mammocom for parameters backup & reload, Stats and errors display
2 BACK-UP of cali- 1. Use the laptop to access screen @<00361>: The full path is: F10/F9/
bration system MAINT/MAINT/TRANS/SAVE
parameters 2. Without leaving this maintenance menu @ <00361>, press ALT-M, to return
<00361> to the Mammocom main menu.
3. Select the “File Transmission" option, then press enter key
4. Insert a formatted diskette into floppy disk drive.
5. In the file transmission menu, define the parameters as required
File name: XXXXXXXX (example, max. 8 characters) To change the file name:
press enter key, use back space key to rease the name and type the new one,
press enter key.
Directory name: A: (default value “A:" can be saved)
Suffix: DAT (default value " DAT" can be saved). Suffix is in fact the file exten-
sion.
Transmit: (do not enter this parameter)
Receive: EQUIPMENT ---> PC (Press “ENTER" to select)
6. Select coded file with the down arrow , then pressing “ENTER": the laptop
then displays:
" Receiving file: A:\XXXXXXXX.DAT from equipment" and the transmitted data
is scrolled on the screen.
7. When the transfer is completed, press alt-M several times to return to the
Mammocom main menu.
8. Reselect “Terminal Emulator" to enable an exit from maintenance mode and
a return to the application by F9
9. Check the presence of the recorded file by selecting the menu “DOS shell"
option and typing the DOS command: DIR/P (The received file size is around
10 KBytes)
11. Then type: EXIT [ENTER] to return to the menu.

Theory of Operation
3 RELOADING of cal- 1. Use the laptop to access screen @<00362>: The full path is: F10/F9//
ibration system MAINT/MAINT/TRANS/LOAD
parameters 2. Without leaving this maintenance menu @ <00362>, press ALT-M, to return
3. Select the “File Transmission" option.
4. Insert the Back-up diskette into floppy disk drive, and check that the file is
present, and the exact spelling of the file name (use DOS shell option if neces-
sary).
5. In the file transmission menu, define the parameters as required :
File name: xxxxxxxx.dat (max. 8 characters) To change the file name: press
enter key, use back space key to erase the name and type the
name of the file to be load.
name one, press enter key.
Directory name: A: (usually)
Suffix: DAT (or other extension)
6. Select TRANSMIT : PC ---> Equipment to start the transfer.
Mammocom main menu.
8. Select “Terminal Emulator" to enable an exit from maintenance mode and a
return to the application.
Note: Following the reloading of the parameters: If there is a checksum error

after the reload
DO NOT MAKE A CHECKSUM but search for the cause (altered file ect.)
4 STATISTIC visual- Go to the screen <00277> Path F10/F9/MAINT/STAT/STATS/TRANS/SHOW.

ization
Bar menu is: KV/MAS TABLE GENER CONFIG DATE
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
Terms used in stat menu are the same than for the DMR that is a little bit con-
fusing.
KV/MAS:
TABLE:
GENER: GENERAL COUNTERS. This sub-menu is very useful and gives the
total of exposures and total
arcings.it gives also the number of exposures made in:
a) AOP standard mode, AOP contrast mode , and AOP dose mode.
b) AEC
c) 2 PTS
CONFI:
DATE: Give the statistic beginning date.

Theory of Operation
5 STATISTICS: save 1. Use the laptop to access screen @<00278>: The full path is: F10/F9/
on a diskette or lap- MAINT/STAT/STATS/TRANS
top hard drive 2. Without leaving this maintenance menu @ <00278> press ALT-M, to return
3. Select the “File Transmission" option.
5. In the file transmission menu, define the parameters as required.
File name: xxxxxx (example, max. 8 characters) To change the file name:
press enter key, use
back space key to erase the name and type the new one, press enter key.
Suffix: DAT (default value " DAT" can be saved)
6. Select Ascii file, then pressing “ENTER": the laptop then displays:
" Receiving file: A:\xxxxxxxx.DAT from equipment" and the transmitted data is
scrolled on the screen.
Mammocom main menu.
8. Reselect “Terminal Emulator" to enable an exit from maintenance mode and
a return to application mode
9. Check the presence of the recorded file by using a DOS command or file
manager.
6 ERROR CODE With laptop and mammocom, go to the screen <00310 > F10/F9/ MAINT
visualization MAINT/CODE/DISPLAY
The laptop screen will be:
ERROR CODE DISPLAY:

PAGE- PAGE+ ERR- ERR+ HOME END
At this stage only the last error is displayed.
Press F1 to get the previous errors

Theory of Operation
7 ERROR CODES: 1. Use the laptop to access screen @<00314>: Full path is: F10/F9/MAINT/
Save on a diskette MAINT/CODES /FUNCT/TRANSFER
or laptop hard drive 2. Without leaving this maintenance menu @ <00314>, press ALT-M, to return
3. Select the “File Transmission" option with the down arrow, then press enter
key.
5. In the file transmission menu, define the parameters as required.
File name: S1234XY8 (example, max. 8 characters)

Suffix: DAT (default value " DAT" can be saved)
6. Select Ascii file, then pressing “ENTER": the laptop then displays:
" Receiving file: A:\xxxxxxxx.DAT from equipment" and the transmitted data is
scrolled on the screen.
Mammocom main menu.
8. Reselect “Terminal Emulator” to enable an exit from maintenance mode and
a return to the application by F9 as many times as needed.
9. Check the presence of the recorded file by selecting the menu “DOS shell"
option and typing the DOS command:
DIR/P (The received file size is around 10 KBytes)
3 LEDS CHARTS OF ELECTRONICS CARDS
Para # TITLE PROCEDURE
1 LED Chart - 200PL1 KEEP ON

LIGHT & ROTA- LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
TION BOARD.
DS1 1/1 C 3 Not implemented on the board
DS2 OFF ON GREEN 1/1 D 3

Theory of Operation
2 LED Chart - 200- KEEP ON

PL3: BUCKY LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
COOMMAND
BOARD DS1 OFF ON GREEN 4/4 C 7 + 15VF
DS2 OFF OFF RED 3/4 C 10 See comment
DS5 OFF ON GREEN 1/4 B 4 Presence grid.
=================================================
COMMENT: Status combination of the DS2 DS3 DS4 give information about
the type of bucky failure.
Look at TROUBLESHOOTING chapter 2 section 3-8-2-1 for more information.
*******************************************************************************
VERY IMPORTANT:
The jumper (needle) U14 “USER_SERVICE" must be OPENED in application

mode.
When U14 is closed, the bucky is more sensitive to “faults". See SM rev2
renewal part page 5-42

PL2 : CMD LIGHT LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
ROTATION BOARD
DS1 OFF OFF RED 4/5 - 7/F ROTATION: lit if fuse F1 blown
DS2 OFF OFF RED 4/5 - 7/D LIGHT : lit if fuse F6 blown
DS3 OFF OFF RED 4/5 - 7/C REL : lit if fuse F5 blown
DS4 OFF ON GREEN 4/5 - E/2 PLUS 5 VOLT
DS5 OFF ON GREEN 4/5 - E/2 PLUS 15 VOLT
DS6 OFF ON GREEN 4/5 - E/2 MINUS 15 VOLT
DS7 OFF ON GREEN 4/5 - D/2 PLUS 30 VOLT alim

PL4 BOARD LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARK
DS1 OFF ON GREEN 6/11 - 1/D CPU TEST OK
DS2 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/G TXTTLB1
DS3 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/F RXDB1
DS4 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/F TXTTLA1
DS5 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/F RSDA1
DS6 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/E TXTTLA2
DS7 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/E RSDA2
DS8 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/D TXTTLB2
DS9 OFF OFF YELLOW 6/11 - 1/D RXDB2
DS10 OFF OFF RED 9/11 - 4/E HALT
DS11 OFF OFF RED 9/11 - 4/E RESET

Theory of Operation

PL5 INTERFACE LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANDBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
BOARD
+ 5 V OFF ON YELLOW 2/10 B 10
+15 V OFF ON YELLOW 2/10 B10
-15 OFF ON YELLOW 2/10 C 8
FPGA_OK OFF? GREEN 9/10 C 10 see comment
GENE_PRES OFF ON GREEN 8/10 F 9 see comment
COMMENT ABOUT FPGA: Field Programmable Gate Array:

When system initialization is OK this led must blinks at 1 second interval.
COMMENT ABOUT GENE_PRES: If this led in not lit, run directly the
GEN_INTERFACE INPUT to determine
what input has the wrong status.
To troubleshoot go to section 5-2 of chapter 2

PL6 : AUXILLARY LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
CONTROL BOARD
DS1 OFF OFF RED 8/4 - 8/D OSCILLATES IF FAILURE ON/OFF
MULT TIMES (TETA_MAX)
DS2 OFF OFF RED 8/14 - 9/D HEAT OVLD
DS3 OFF OFF RED 8/10 - 8/D HEAT_OP_F
DS4 OFF OFF RED 8/14 - 9/E BIAS_OP
DS5 OFF OFF RED 8/14 - 8/E OVLD_I_LC
DS6 OFF ON GREEN 6/14 - 8/E LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY OK
DS7 OFF OFF YELLOW 10/14 - 6/C ON WITH PREP BUTTON
(STARTER_PRES)
DS8 OFF OFF YELLOW 10/14 - 6/B ON WITH PREP THEN OFF
DS9 YELLOW 10/14 - 7/D MAINS_OK
DS10 OFF ON YELLOW 10/14 - 8/E DC_BUS_OK
DS11 OFF OFF YELLOW 10/14 - 7/E ON WITH PREP(HEAT_OK)
DS12 OFF OFF YELLOW 10/14 - 8/F BIAS_OK
DS13 OFF OFF YELLOW 10/14 - 7/F ON WITH PREP(STARTER_OK)

Theory of Operation

PL9: POWER SUP- LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
PLY
DS1 ON OFF RED 5/8 - 6/D
DS2 OFF ON GREEN 5/8 - 6/B
DS3 OFF ON YELLOW 5/8 - 5/F
DS4 ON ON GREEN 2/8 - 3/F MINUS 15V
DS5 ON ON GREEN 2/8 - 3/E PLUS 15V
DS6 OFF ON YELLOW 1/8 - 7/B PWR_DISH
DS7 OFF ON NEON 1/8 - 4/D ON FOR 3 SEC THEN OFF(PWR_PRE)
DS9 OFF OFF YELLOW 1/8 - 6/F ON AFTER 3 SEC(PWR_ON)
=============================================
Note: From January 97 a new 300PL9 is introduced.
300PL9 Before January 97: No test points on the board
300PL9 After January 97: This board has test points.
LOOK AT RENEWAL PART chapter to know the difference between the two
boards.

PL11: AUXILLARY LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANDBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
POWER BOARD
DS1 OFF ON GREEN 2/3 - 4/C MINUS 12V_BIAS_PWR
DS2 OFF ON GREEN 2/3 - 4/B PLUS 12V_BIAS_PWR
DS3 OFF ON NEON 3/3 - 4/E + SUPPLY HEATER: DC_BUS
DS4 OFF? YELLOW 1/3 - 7/F ON If SF selected
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------
Comment about DS4:
:In application mode the status change of DS4 requires a preparation.
If the other focus is selected DS4 will change status only at the next prepara-
tion.
COMMENT ABOUT DS3 neon: The source of “this" DC_BUS voltage is on

300PL9 1/8 B 10

PL17:LOW VOLT- LED'S ALIVE BUTTON STANBY COLOR SCHEMATIC LOC REMARKS
AGE DISTRIBU-
TION DS1 OFF ON YELLOW 1/3 - 7/F LVS_PRE
DS2 ON ON YELLOW 2/3 - 6/D IN PARRALLEL TO K1 RELAIS COIL
DS3 OFF ON YELLOW 1/3 - 10/F LVS_ON
DS4 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 2/D PLUS 15 VBF
DS5 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 3/D PLUS 15 VS
DS6 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 2/F PLUS 5 VBF
DS7 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 3/F PLUS 5 VS
DS8 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 2/E MINUS 15 VBF
DS9 ON ON GREEN 1/3 - 3/E MINUS 15 VS
DS10 ON ON NEON 2/3 - 9/F 300 PL7 IS SUPPLIED

Theory of Operation
4 THEORY OF OPERATION OF SENOGRAPHE 700T/800T

4-1 Generator Overview
1 GENERATOR Generator Function: Control Emissions from the X-Ray Tube.

OVERVIEW
It includes 4 inverters:
- Bias:
Concentrates the electron beam, and adjusts the width of the focal point on the
tube anode.
- Heating:
Monitors filament temperature to control the tube emission current.
- High Voltage:
Accelerates electrons to obtain the required anode bombardment energy and
x-ray photon emissions.
- Anode Starter:
Brings the anode to the rotation speed needed to spread the anode bombard-
ment energy over a ring rather
than a point.
1-1 X-Ray Generator - High Voltage: kV

Adjustment Param-
eters KV mA - The high voltage is adjustable by the operator on the console in Two-Point
Mode (manual) and One-Point
Mode (AEC).
- Its value may vary between 22 and 35 kV on the Bonsai.
- kV adjustment amplitude of the high voltage is an hardware and software
functions (CAL017 in SM).
Tube Current: mA
- The tube current is not directly accessible to the user.

- The currents used depend on the focal point and the high voltage, according
to a fixed table.
- Its value may vary between 20 and 100 mA on the Bonsai.
- The mA adjustment of the high voltage generator is a hardware and software
functions via the heating
current filament control.
Different modes:
1) manual
- The operator from the console can select the value of mAs in Two-Point
Mode (exposure stopped by the mAsmeter/Coulomb meter).
- Its value may vary between 4 and 600 mAs on the Bonsai.

Theory of Operation
1-2 X-Ray Generator - Exposure Time: ms

Adjustment Param- - The user does not directly control exposure time.
eters - Time depends on the mAs and mA used in manual and on the optical density
in AEC or AOP.
2) AEC mode: The user chooses the KV value.
3) AOP mode: (Automatic optimization parameters) The system automatically
chooses Kv value and filter Heating current: Ich
- The heating current is not directly accessible by the user.

- Its initial value (before exposure) depends on the focal point, the mA level
required, and kV used.
- The heating current is continually adjusted during exposure by the mA con-
trol.
- Its value may vary between 3.5 and 7.5 A rms.
- It must not exceed 5.5 A rms constant (to protect the filament), 7.5 A rms in
Boost Mode.
BIAS voltage: Vbias
- The BIAS voltage is not directly accessible by the user.

- Its value depends on focal point (no BIAS in wide focal point, only in small
Focus) and the kV used.
- It varies between 58 and 102 V.
1-3 X-Ray Generator - Anode Speed: RPM

Adjustment Param-
eters - Anode speed is not directly accessible by the user.
- Synchronization speed for control of the asynchronous motor is set at 3000

rpm, single speed on the Bonsai.
4-2 General Structure of Bonsai Generator
2 GENERAL STRUC- - The Bonsai generator consists of four inverters, their control systems, and
TURE their power supplies.
- It also supplies power to the System/Gantry Boards.

Theory of Operation
2-1 Inverter Control Interfacing with the Prep/Rad buttons and the console:
- Command sequencing,
- Sending instructions,
- Monitoring performance of the converters,
- Progress of the exposure.
The above functions are handled by the Interface and CPU boards.
The Interface Board handles interfacing between the CPU Board and the two
Generator Control Boards.
- Auxiliaries Control Board:
. BIAS control,
. Heating control,
. Starter control,
. Line supply.
- High Voltage Control Board:

. High voltage converter control, (Sequence controller of the inverter + regula-
tion of the high voltage/kV),
. Measurement of the tube current (mA).
2-2 Inverter Power The inverters themselves are implemented on the power boards:
Boards - Heating Inverter and
- BIAS Inverter: Auxiliaries Power Board
- Anode Starter Driver: Starter Power Board
- High Voltage Inverter: High Voltage Inverter Board.
The BIAS, heating, and high voltage inverters power the transformers, rectifi-
ers, and filtering in the high voltage unit.
The high voltage, BIAS voltage, and heating current are transmitted from the
unit to the tube over a high-voltage four-wire cable.
The high-voltage (kV) measurement, and the measurement of the tube current
(mA), are made inside the
high voltage unit, and retransmitted to the High Voltage Control Board.
The power supply/network adaptation section is mainly contained on the

Power Supply Board.
The AC power supply input filter is fitted on the Room Interface Board, with
connections to the outside
grouped in the lower part of the electronics cabinet, near the cable entrances.
The gantry power supply, consisting of the 27 V transformer and the two
boards, is also located in the lower part of the cabinet.

Theory of Operation
4-3 Power Requirements & DC BUS
3 POWER REQUIRE- 7OOT/800T are mono phase senographes.

MENT & DC BUS IST004 job card of the Service manual describes the connection to the main
supply. Possible nominal line voltage values are: 200V 208 V 220V 230V
240V.
Position the jumper SK1 for correct setting of the transformer 300PL18. There
is no setting for line frequency (50 or 60 Hertz). DC BUS: The voltage across
the HV inverter capacitor is called DC BUS. See schematic book 300PL9 page
1/ 8. This voltage is used for the HV inverter, the Heater inverter and the Rotor
inverter. VERY IMPORTANT: The DC-BUS voltage is proportional to the
actual incoming line voltage. In other words the setting of 300PL18 does not
affect the voltage of the DC BUS.
DC BUS voltage is approximatly incoming voltage multiply by 1.4. For example
if the incoming line is 208 V the DC BUS voltage = 208 X 1.4 = 291 volts DC
when the Senographe is in stand by status. During exposure the ripple
increases in function of the line resistance and load (KV X mA).
See CAL015 in SM to make correct measurement. The following screens give
the description of Power-Up sequence. It can be used as troubleshooting
additional information when a problem origin seems to be Power-Up.
3-1 Power-Up 1) - The button “OFF" of the Senographe Console is lit.

sequence: Keep (and the LED DS1 (“OFF") on 300-PL9 Power Supply Bd too).
alive mode
2) - The LED DS10 on 300-PL17 LV Distribution Bd is lit.

(DC voltage from AC MAINS used by 300-PL7 LVPS).
3) - On 300-PL17 Bd, all the following LEDS are lit:
. +15VS: DS4 & DS5 (after fuse),

. -15VS: DS8 & DS9 (after fuse),
. +5VS: DS6 & DS7 (after fuse).
Note: LEDs only indicate the presence of a power source, not necessarily the
correct power.
4) - On 300-PL9 Power Supply Bd, LEDs DS4 & DS5 (15VM) are lit.
(This voltage is made on 300-PL9 Bd with +5VS voltage coming from 300-PL6
AUX CTRL Bd, thru cable W8).

Theory of Operation
3-2 Power-Up - Press button " I " of the Senographe Console.

sequence - Button "
I " is pressed 1) - The LED DS1 (OFF) on 300-PL9 Power Supply Bd switches to “OFF".
(The button “STOP" on Senographe Console switches to “OFF" too)
2) - The LED DS2 on 300-PL9 Bd is lit.

(The button " I " on Senographe Console is lit too)
3) - If the DC_BUS voltage is less than 30V, the signal LVS_PRE (Low Voltage
Preload) is sent from 300-PL6 Bd to 300-PL17 Bd. Then the relay X1 on 300-
PL17 Bd is closed, the LED DS1 on 300-PL17 Bd is lit, and a preload of the
LVPS is allowed (40 ms).
4) - On 300-PL17 BD, the relay X2 is closed and the LED DS3 is lit (LVPS is
powered directly by MAINS).
5) - After 40 ms, the LED DS6 on 300-PL6 AUX CTRL Bd is lit. It correspond to
signal LVPS_OK.
3-3 Power-Up TO POWER-UP Low Voltage Power Supply must be is OK (LVPS_OK) DS6 lit
sequence - DC BUS on 300PL6
Power Supply OK .
Ready for a prepa- 1) - On 300-PL9 POWER SUPPLY Bd, the relay K4 is powered to disconnect
ration the discharge resistor of the
DC BUS (the LED DS6 on 300-PL9 Bd monitors the DC BUS voltage).
2) - After 40 ms, on 300-PL9 Bd, the relay K5 is powered (and LED DS8
should flash momentarily) to allow
the pre-load of the DC BUS and 27V GANTRY Power Supply.
3) - After 3 s, the DC BUS voltage must be > 180V (On 300-PL9 Bd, the relay
X1 is powered and the LED DS9 is lit):
. If not, the system shutdowns
Note:
- A bad DC BUS voltage can be due to the relay X1 failure (in spare part).
- DC_BUS = Incoming Line X 1.4
4) - After 40 ms, the relay K5 of 300-PL9 Bd is powered off (LED DS8 is

switched off), and the DC BUS is directly powered by AC MAINS (neon lamp
DS8 is lit).

Theory of Operation
4-4 Detailed description of Bonsai generator

4-4-1 BIAS Inverter
1 BIAS INVERTER - The BIAS inverter is a DC voltage source varying between 30 and 300 V (68 to
GENERAL PRINCI- 102 V used on the 700T/ 800T) depending on the cathode potential. It is used
PLE to produce the bias voltage applied to the focusing cup.
Note:
In large focus, BIAS voltage value (Vp) = 0.
In small focus, Vp depends of the kV value as follows:
kV 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Vp 68 72.25 76.5 80.75 85 89.25 93.5 97.75 102 98.7 95.64 92.72 90 87.41
- This voltage allows one of the two dimensions of the tube focal point to be
adjusted.
- The BIAS converter consists of a series inverter, operating in Impulse
Hyporesonant Mode, at a natural frequency of about 70 kHz.
- The inverter is powered at +/-12 V (sourced by regulators from the +/-15 V of
the main low voltage power supply).
- The LC resonant circuit is excited by the application of square-wave voltages,
and the resonant current thus obtained is injected into the elevator transformer
in the high voltage unit.
- A voltage doubler on the transformer secondary allows rectification and filter-
ing to obtain the DC voltage.
- The transformer also isolates the inverter with respect to the cathode poten-
tial.
The BIAS voltage reference is a frequency signal sent by the CPU-Interface
Board: TP44 300PL6.
1-1 BIAS INVERTER - The BIAS_ON signal (300PL6 2/14 B 1) enables the polarization inverter com-
Command, control, mand.
and confirmation - The BIAS_FREQ signal (300PL6 2/14 A 4) is the BIAS voltage reference,
Signals transmitted as a frequency.
- The BIAS_OK signal confirms operation of the bias converter. Bias OK is
indicated by 300PL6 10/14 DS12
Note: Current detection is made by one of the secondary of T4 on 300PL6 2/
14 by operational U3.
BIAS_LVL_OK is found on TP1on 300PL-6 BIAS_LVL_OP is found on TP2 on
300PL-6
Physical Implementation:
- The BIAS inverter is controlled from 300PL6: Auxiliaries Control Board. The
sequence controller is implemented as a state machine in the BIAS/Heating
EPLD.
The inverter itself is located on 300PL11: Auxiliaries Power Board.
BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE versus mA: The reference of bias voltage is 3400 X
mA ref. For example at
30KV mA reference is 30 mA in SF, therefore Bias reference is 102 Volts.
In SM CAL002 page 4/6 Res = + 3.400 E+3 is the Ratio.
DO NOT INCREASE THIS FACTOR TO REDUCE THE SF SIZE.

Theory of Operation
4-4-2 Heater Inverter
2 HEATER The heater inverter is an rms AC current source varying between 3.5 and 8 A
INVERTER - GEN- (7.5 A maximum used in
ERAL PRINCIPLE Boost Mode on the 700T/800T) at the cathode potential. It allows the tempera-
ture of one of the two tube filaments to be controlled, and thus controls the
electron flow emission by the cathode (tube current).
- The inverter, operates in pulse hyporesonant mode, at a frequency of about

20 kHz.
- The inverter is directly powered by the DC BUS (DC_BUS value is incoming

line multiply by 1.4). The CPU terminates the exposure if DC_BUS goes under
180 Volts.
- The LC resonant circuit is excited by application of square-wave voltages,

and the resonant current
obtained is injected into one of the two transformers located in the high voltage
unit.
- Because the tube is bi-focus, the focal point size is selected by choosing the
filament to be heated.
The filament is selected by choosing one of the two heating transformers, at its
primary.
- The transformers isolate the inverter with respect to the cathode potential.
The filament is supplied is AC.
mA are regulated by a close loop.
- The rms current command is sent by the CPU-Interface Boards to the adjust-
ment loop as a 12 bit serial word, and is received by a serial DAC on the Auxil-
iaries Control Board.
2-1 Heater inverter - - The HEAT_ON signal enables the heater inverter command.
Control, Command
& Confirmation Sig- - The SRI_HEAT, HEAT_STROBE, and HEAT_LOAD signals are used to
nals transmit the heating current command to the serial DAC.
Note:
- In application mode (Manual, AEC & AOP modes), the Tube Current is regu-
lated during exposure:
. During exposure, the DAC output of Heater inverter (Located on 300-PL6

AUX CTRL Bd.) changes if the measured mA (MA_MEAS signal on 300-PL8
HV CTRL Bd.) are not equal to the Reference (Requested mA).
- The HEAT_OK signal confirms operation of the heater inverter.

Theory of Operation
2-2 Principle of rms- - Heating current measured

Value Slave Loop
- Squaring of the heating current measured
- Integration of the square of the heating current measured
- inverter control signal
The heating current is measured at the primary of the isolating transformer.

This measurement is obtained by a current transformer and injected into a
multiplier, to obtain an image of the square of the filament heating
current instantaneous value.
- This signal, subtracted from the command signal, it self transmitted as a volt-
age proportional to the square of the required heating current, is applied to an
integrator.
- The integrator output is constantly monitored by a comparator, that generates

the control signal for the heating inverter each time the integrated signal
passes zero.
2-3 Physical Implemen- - The heater inverter control is on the 300-PL6 Auxiliaries Control Board.
tation
It includes:
- The sequence controller, implemented as a state machine in the Bias/Heater

EPLD.
- The serial DAC for heating control and the regulation loop.
- The inverter itself is located on the 300-PL11 Auxiliaries Power Board.

Theory of Operation
4-4-3 Anode Starter
3 ANODE STARTER - The anode starter is a three-phase asynchronous motor driver. The synchro-
- GENERAL PRIN- nization speed used on the Pearl/Sapphire is 3000 rpm.
CIPLE
- The stator and rotor of this motor are located respectively in the housing of
the tube, and in the tube itself.
The anode starter allows the anode to be rotated, to spread the calorific
energy of electron beam impact
over a ring, rather than on one fixed point.
- The anode starter consists of a three-phase chopper, powered directly from

the DC BUS.
- The stator is powered by a three-phase voltage, modulated by chopping. The

cut-off point varies,
depending on the motor control mode:
. Acceleration: rotation of the anode from stop,
. Maintenance: maintains the speed of rotation,
. Braking: active braking of the anode until it stops completely.
- Acceleration is obtained directly by injecting a voltage at the synchronization

frequency.
- The stator is connected to the anode, at ground. The three-phase unit is

therefore directly connected to
the stator.
3-1 Anode Starter - Control, Command, and Confirm Signals

Control, Command
& Confirm signals - The STARTER_ON signal enables starter operation according to the mode
chosen by the other control
signals.
- The STARTER_SPEED signal is retained for future compatibility. It is not

used on the Bonsai.
- The MAINT_STARTER and BRAKE_STARTER signals control the starter

operation mode.
- The STARTER_OK signal confirms operation of the anode starter.
Physical Implementation
- The anode starter control is on the Auxiliaries Control Board. The sequence
controller is implemented as a state machine in the Starter/Network EPLD.
- The three-phase chopper is on the Starter Power Board.

Theory of Operation
4-4-4 High-Voltage Inverter
4 HIGH VOLTAGE The high voltage inverter is a negative DC power source, varying between 22
INVERTER - GEN- and 35 kV, applied on the tube cathode.
ERAL PRINCIPLE
- This high voltage allows acceleration of the electrons emitted by the cathode.
- It consists of a serial inverter, operating in pulsed hyporesonant mode, at a

frequency of about 150 kHz.
- The inverter is powered by the DC BUS:
DANGER !!! TAKE CARE WHEN WORKING ON THE DC BUS !!!
- The LC resonant circuit is excited by applying square-wave voltages and the

resonant current thus obtained is injected onto the elevator transformer in the
high voltage unit.
- A voltage doubler installed on the transformer secondary provides the DC
voltage by rectification and filtering. The transformer also isolates the inverter
with respect to the cathode potential.
- Voltage adjustment is obtained by varying the inverter pulse recurrence fre-
quency.
- The high voltage (kV) command is sent by the CPU-Interface Boards to the
peak kV closed loop, as a 12-bit serial word, received by a serial DAC.
4-1 High Voltage - The XRAY_ON signal gives the command to send the high voltage to the
Inverter - Control, converter.
Command & Con- - The SRI_HV, HV_STROBE, and HV_LOAD signals command the serial
firm Signals DAC.
- The SECURITY_READ signal allows the inverter safety inputs to be read,
and reset if necessary.
- The HV_OK signal confirms the actual KV has reached the REF. This signal
is used by the mAs
measurement software.
- The signal KV_SUP_5 informs the CPU of high voltage detected at the start
of exposure.
(KV_SUP_5 must switch to “YES" 1.3 ms after the beginning of exposure).
- HL_SECURITY: Stops the inverter. See tsg chapter 524
Timeout regulation: If the actual kV does not reach the reference within the 8
ms after the beginning of the exposure (XRAY_ON), then the exposure is
stopped.
LL_SECURITY: Stops the inverter and for 20 ms and commands inverter
again. Ifa LL security occurs 7 times, the exposure is terminated. See chapter
525
- SOFTWARE security: If the kV value requested (checked by HV_OK) is not
obtained within the 20 ms after the beginning of the exposure (XRAY_ON),
then an error message as 006/003 should be displayed.
- The HV_TEST signal is applied to enable inverter operation without load (no
heating on the tube, therefore no load).

Theory of Operation
4-2 High Voltage Principle of the High Voltage Slave Loop at Peak Value.
Inverter - Principle
of High Voltage - The high voltage is slaved to the kV command at peak values.
Slave Loop at Peak
value - The high voltage measurement is subtracted from the command sent by the
CPU. This kV signal is processed to store from one converter pulse to the
next, the high voltage increase obtained (kV).
- The inverter will be triggered again (a control pulse on one of the switches of
the inverter half-bridge) when the kV measurement drops below the last kV
obtained for the same switch.
Physical implementation
- The high voltage converter control is located on the High Voltage Control
Board. The sequence controller is implemented as a state machine in the High
Voltage EPLD.
- The high voltage inverter is implemented on the High Voltage Inverter Board.
4-4-5 mA measurement
5 mA MEASURE- 1 General Principle

MENT
- The tube current is injected on the anode side of the high voltage rectifier on
a measurement bridge. The voltage obtained is converted to frequency by a
VCO. This frequency is measured by two counters.
- If the maximum current is exceeded, this is detected on the measurement

voltage by a comparator.
This information is sent to the high voltage inverter safety processor.
2 Control, Command, and Confirmation Signals
- The MA_MEAS signal is the tube current measurement converted to fre-

quency.
. This signal is used to control the Heater Inverter. If MA_MEAS signal is not
equal to the mA requested (REF) during exposure, it will change the value of
the DAC output of Heater Inverter (300-PL6 AUX CTRL
Bd) to adjust the Heater current value.
3 Physical implementation
- The frequency conversion part of the tube current measurement system is

found on the High Voltage Control Board, and the counters are on the Inter-
face Board.

Theory of Operation
4-4-6 Line Power Supplies
6 LINE POWER SUP- - The power supply subassembly provides AC power supply adaptation for the
PLIES entire device.
This subassembly includes:
. DC BUS:
The AC supply voltage is simply rectified and filtered to power the three invert-
ers:
(heating, starter, high voltage). The value should be between 254V and 373V
in stand-by mode, dependind of AC mains voltage. At power-up , if the
DC_BUS does not reach 180 V in 2.9 sec the system stopps the sequence . If
the CD_BUS goes over 400 V the system stops also the sequence.
. 400 PL7 : Low Voltage Power Supplies: + 5V, +15V, -15 V (Schematics are
not in the SCH book)
. 27 V DC: A transformer provides adaptation to, and isolation from, the AC

supply. The voltage is rectified and filtered to supply the power boards for the
gantry and the console.
- The keep alive voltage is provided by the LVPS. 300PL17
- The device and, in particular, the DC BUS, are powered up with a pre-
charged resistor (located behind 300 PL9, shunted when the voltage on the
DC BUS reaches an acceptable level.
- This resistor is also use to provide the DC BUS filtering on power down.
- The voltage level on the DC BUS, the AC supply presence on the line, and
the power consumption of the anode starter are all continuously monitored,
and transmitted to the rest of the system.

Theory of Operation
6-1 Line Power Sup- - The voltage on the system AC power supply connection is continuously mon-
plies - Control, itored. It is confirmed as present to the CPU with the signal MAINS_OK. The
Command & Con- MAINS_OK signal is active as soon as the ON signal is received, if the AC
firm Signals supply is present. This signal drops out once the OFF signal is received from
the console.
- The DC_BUS_OK signal confirms the closing of the main relay (shunting the
pre-charge resistor of the DC BUS), and the nominal voltage level to the CPU.
If the maximum permitted value is exceeded, or an offset with respect to the
minimum level required is detected, this causes the DC_BUS_OK to drop out.
Note: If the DC BUS voltage value reaches 400V, the system is cut-off.
- The LVPS_OK signal confirms a correct level on the three low-voltage power
supplies.
Note: The power supply current for the anode motor driver is constantly moni-
tored to avoid overload of the stator located in the tube housing, that could
cause abnormal overheating:
- STARTER_PRES is active in Acceleration, Maintenance, and Braking

Modes.
- STARTER_ACCEL is active in Acceleration Mode. Its level is undefined in
Braking Mode.
These two signals are inactive when the starter has stopped. If not, a “K" fail-
ure shall be detected and the system stopped.
6-2 Line Power Sup- - The line control is located on the Auxiliaries Control Board. The sequence
plies - Physical controller is implemented in the form of a state machine in the Starter/Network
Implementation EPLD.
- The mains filter is located in the lower part of the cabinet, near the supply
cable entrance.
- The power section is on the Power Supply Board.
- The network control is on the Auxiliaries Control Board. The sequence con-
troller is implemented as a state machine in the Starter/Network EPLD.
- The 27 V DC power supply is installed in the lower part of the cabinet as a

transformer, a voltage selection board, and the Supply Gantry Board.

Theory of Operation
4-4-7 Tube Current (mA) adjustment
7 TUBE CURRENT 1 General Principle

(mA) ADJUST-
MENT - Tube current adjustment is software implemented.
- Based on the mA measurement, the CPU corrects filament heating to obtain

the reference current for the high voltage used.
2 Large Focal Point
- There is a bi-univocal ratio between the reference kV and mA:
- The tube current rises linearly between 22 and 30 kV, and at a constant
power of 3 kW above 30 kV.
3 Small Focal Point
- The tube current rises linearly between 22 and 30 kV, and at a constant
power of 900 W above 30 kV.
4-5 Description of Gantry Operation

4-5-1 Elevator function
1 OVERVIEW OF - Function allowing the image receiver to be raised with respect to the patient.
ELEVATOR FUNC-
TION - Movement controlled by a DC motor, with a power board receiving movement
instructions in pure non-polarized PWM form (non-dis-ruptable frequency),
remembering that the cyclic ratio of 50% is equivalent to zero power, and
therefore no movement.
1-1 Elevator - Control - PWM_ELEV signal generated on the Interface FPGA, programmed by the
Signals CPU over 8 bits, at a time constant of 64 s.
- ELEV_ON controls power on the chopper.
- ELEV_SOFT_PRES watchdog for a period of 195 ms, set by

ELEV_SOFT_PRES_TRIG (internal to FPGA).
- VALID_ELEV_ON software enable, result of a movement command on the

buttons.
- ELEV+/-_SW movement control information from the buttons.

Theory of Operation
1-2 Elevator - Check - OPER_PRES_SW signal active simultaneously with ELEV+/-_SW to check
signals operator presence, and an actual
movement command.
- ELEV_ON may be reread from the FPGA to give a status correlation.
- ELEV_STATE_OFF power return signal giving movement status (0 = eleva-

tor moving).
- ELEV_H_SW, ELEV_L_SW, ELEV_SECURITY: detection of upper stops,

lower stops, and broken belt respectively.
- CEMF_ELEV frequency signal reporting the speed of movement (no move-

ment is indicated by 150 kHz).
1-3 Elevator - Power - PWM_ELEV Power results from filtering PWM_ELEV to give an analog com-
Signals mand between 0 and -10 V to which an offset of 5 V and I_SENSE (return of
current image in the motor) are added.
- The resulting analog command is injected into two PWM generators (one for
rise, one for fall) which controls the power chopper connected to the motor.
4-5-2 Compression function
2 OVERVIEW OF - Function allowing the breast to be held and compressed, to produce the best
COMPRESSION x-ray image, in terms of density and stability.
FUNCTION
- This function, produced by the software-controlled hardware, consists of
three sub-functions:
see below.
2-1 Compression - Con- - Provided by a double set of two footswitches (compression/decompression

trol Function with each set), and a double rotating hand-control, the command is transferred
to the CPU Board by the Interface Board, which in return receives the elec-
tronic command digitized in an FPGA as a PWM-type frequency command
(Pulse Width Modulation: PWM_COMPx), and a polarity command
(MOT_COMPx signal).
- The motor is a two-phase, x = 2 pulse motor. These commands are sent to

the power board, which will transform them to analog power signals to control
the compression motor. “COMP_ON" is the software command authorizing
power to the motor (Even without movement, comp_on may be activated to
hold the compression).
- A decompression button is available on the console.

Theory of Operation
2-2 Compression - - Compression enable is set by the software command (VALID_COMP_ON)

Check Function and remains active as long as there is no problem. Devaluing it completely
cuts the power enable control COMP_ON, the result of monitoring the foot-
switches, buttons and MOT_COMPx. As regards the hardware, this all takes
place inside the Interface FPGA.
The check signals are as follows:
- VALID_COMP_ON,
- FOOT_SW_PRES (pressure on one of the footswitches),
- PRES_ADJ (FPGA result from action on the buttons, signal active for 250
ms),
- COMP_FORCE (compression force is measured by the CPU via a PTM on
Interface),
- COMP_STATE_OFF (0 indicates that compression is active. This is a return
signal from the Power Board).
2-3 Compression - - Produced with one chopper per phase controlled by a PWM, in turn con-
Power Function trolled by the signals PWM_COMPx and MOT_COMPx from Interface.
- The software sends a rectified sinusoidal signal with digital polarity, 6 bits for
amplitude + 1 polarity bit per PWM to the INTERFACE board, that is responsi-
ble for creating the PWM command carrying the information.
4-5-3 Arm Rotation function
3 ARM ROTATION - Function allowing the image receptor to be placed at all angles around the
central axis of the elevator.
1 - Control Signals:
- ROT_ON signal allowing the current to pass from the 30 V_gantry in the
braking coil via a power transistor,
- ROT_SW rotation command from a button.
2 - Check Signals:
- ROT_STATE_OFF rotation possible giving a signal at 0.
- ANGLE gives the precise value of the angle for the 800T.
- ROT_SOFT_PRES_TRIG arming signal for the watchdog for a period
between 260 and 390 ms.
- ROT_SOFT_PRES FPGA internal watchdog to authorize ROT_ON.
- OPER_PRES_SW duplicate signal with ROT_SW allowing the consistency
of the rotation status to be checked.
3 - Power Signal:
- No signal as such, power comes from the command ROT_ON.

Theory of Operation
4-5-4 Exposure Control
4 OVERVIEW OF - Function depending both on the status of the generator and the gantry.
EXPOSURE CON-
TROL - The status of the gantry is considered here. This consists in monitoring sys-
tem performance (x-ray dose and movement safety) while the patient is
exposed to x-rays. The subassemblies concerned in this function are as fol-
lows (see below):
4-1 Exposure Control - - Five signals travel between the Interface Board and HTPM:
Photoelectron Multi-
plier - Serialized programming of the High Voltage converter (SRI_HTPM,
HTPM_STROBE, HTPM_LOAD).
- Measurement of PM (current: I_PM, and voltage: HT_PM) called PM_MEAS.
- The I_HT_CMD command from the relay, switching I_PM or HT_PM onto the
PM_MEAS line.
See chapter 2 section 6 for the description of PM test.
4-2 Exposure Control - Four signals travel between the bucky/cassette holder and the Interface
Bucky/Cassette Board:
holder
- GRID_PRES telling the software of the presence of a bucky. It is not active if
a cassette-holder is present.
- SYNC_GRID giving information on the movement of the grid in exposure, in

the case of a bucky.
Not used for cassette holders.
- CASSETTE_PRES allowing exposure to be authorized, since a bucky or cas-

sette holder is connected and holding a new cassette.
- 24x30 size information for the bucky or cassette holder installed on the sys-
tem.
4-3 Exposure Control - Four decoding signals for the collimation bar are sent to Interface:
Collimator
- DIAPH(0:3) coding for these four bits is such that the two msb are the mirror
image of the two lsb.
- The four bits are in electrical series. A continuity fault on one bit therefore
results in Error Code 1111, and an operation fault on one of the bits leads to
an error in the axis of symmetry for the 2 x 2-bit word.

Theory of Operation
4-4 Console Two signals are transmitted by the console to control the x-ray exposure:
- PREPA_SW active at 1 tells the software of an exposure request coming,

and allows it to initialize exposure (rotation of the starter).
- GRAPHY_SW active at 1 tells the software the required exposure (x-ray

transmission requested).
4-5 Others FAN

- A signal tells the software that the fan is operating, in order to monitor the x-
ray tube cooling curve.
MAGNIFICATION PLATE
- Two signals give the type of mag plate in place. (Note: MAG (2) is available
for future use.)
- MAG (0:1) active at 0 gives the information to the Interface Board.
GANTRY
- The gantry must remain immobile and stable during the exposure, and allow
the patient to release himself/herself after exposure.

Revision History
Revision History
This page is intentionally left in English.
REFERENCE DATE REASON FOR CHANGE PAGES

2149145-8EN_r1 December 6, 2007 Advanced Service Manual (asm) for Senographe 700T/ 224
800T Acquisition System.
Conversion to FM based on inter-active document

2149145-200 rev 2.
rev.fm Page no. 223

Manufacturer’s address:
GE Medical Systems SCS
BP 34
F 78533 BUC CEDEX France
www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

GE - 700-800T Advanced Service Manual - ASM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE - 700-800T Advanced Service Manual - ASM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Senographe 700T/800T Acquisition System

Advanced Service Manual

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Page no. 2 Cover.fm

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Chapter 1: How To Use

Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Guide

Chapter 3: Error Messages

Chapter 4: Signal Name List

Chapter 5: FRU List (Renewal Parts)

Chapter 6: Theory of Operation

Seno800T_TOC.fm Page no. 3

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

2-12 Saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Page no. 4 Seno800T_TOC.fm

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

CHAPTER 1 HOW TO USE

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

1-2 Signal Name List

1-3 FRU List (or Renewal Parts)

1-4 Theory of Operation

- See Table of Contents on page 3 for detailed contents.

How-to-use.fm Page no. 5 Chapter 1

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Name Description & Notes

OTHER DOCUMENTA- part number 2135575-100 (English version) or later.

SCHEMATICS 2148335-100 rev1 May 96 rev 2: January 97 or later.

OTHER DOCUMENTA- Part number of SM 2146692-100

Chapter 1 Page no. 6 How-to-use.fm

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Name Description & Notes

OTHER DOCUMENTA- There are two PIM documentations.

ITEMS TO BE SUPPLIED BY PEOPLE WHO EQUIPS THE TRUCK:

How-to-use.fm Page no. 7 Chapter 1

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

3 CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL

Chapter 1 Page no. 8 How-to-use.fm

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

CHAPTER 2 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Section # TEST or STATUS RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

1 POWER-UP - To be able to switch on the senographe, the button “STOP” on the

TSG.fm Page no. 9 Chapter 2

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Section # TEST or STATUS RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

THEORY OF SEQUENCE OF KEEP ALIVE STATUS (Etat de

Note: These 3 leds are lit even if F1 F2 F3 are blown.

IN SUMMARY THE CORRECT STATUS OF KEEP ALIVE IS:

- If indicator “STOP" (OFF) of the Senographe Console is lit, go to

- If indicator “STOP" (OFF) of the Senographe Console is not lit, go

Chapter 2 Page no. 10 TSG.fm

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Section # TEST or STATUS RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

# ACTION 1) If neon DS10 is not lit,

# ACTION 2) If neon DS10 is lit,

>>> If DS2 300PL17 is lit, go to section 1-1-2 to continue checking

1-1-2 Low Voltage Power Sup- VERY IMPORTANT:

IMPORTANT TO KNOW: The difference of the + 5 Volts (at TP39

Note: With some power supplies, it is difficult to adjust in a way to

TSG.fm Page no. 11 Chapter 2

Revision 1 Advanced Service Manual 2149145-8EN

Section # TEST or STATUS RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

The source of the +5VS is on 300PL17. See SCHEMATICS 1/3.

REMINDER: To be able to power up the seno, the keep alive status